xerox printer-copier workcentre xd series parts & service
TRANSCRIPT
THE DOCUMENT COMPANY XEROX
WorkCentre XD Series Copier/ Printer Service Documentation
CAUTION Cerbin components in the WorkCentre XD Series CopierIPrinter are susceptible to damage
701 P I 7370 April 2000
\t/ from electrostatic discharge. Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
Introduction About This Manual .. .................................................................. 3
. . ., . Organ~zat~on .................................................................................................... 3
How to Use This Manual 4 Other Information 5 Reference Symbology 6
Workcentre XD SERIES
Introduction
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
introduction
Workcentre XD SERIES
About This Manual Organization This manual is part of a documentation system which also includes training.This manual con- This manual is divided into seven sections. The title and description of each section is listed tains Repair Analysis Procedures, Repair Procedures, Adjustment Procedures, Parts List, below. Diagnostic Procedures, and Wiring Data information that will enable a Service Representative to repair the WorkCentre XD Series family of copierlprinters (XD1001XD1021XD103f1XD1041 A Publication Comment Sheet is provided at the end of this manual. XDl05flXDl20fIXDI 25flXD13OdflXDI 55df).
Section 1 - SERVICE CALL PROCEDURES This section contains the following:
Initial ActionsISystem Checks
System Checkout
Final Action
initial ActionsISystem Checks
This identifies how to collect the data necessary to decide how to proceed with the service call. It classifies the problem and refers you to the appropriate Repair Analysis Procedure.
System Checkout
The System Checkout procedure is used to verify that the copier is operating properly after a repair has been made.
Final Action
The Final Action procedure identifies the steps that must be performed before closing out the service call.
Section 2 - REPAIR ANALYSIS PROCEDURES (RAPS) This section contains the Repair Analysis Procedures (RAPs) necessary to repair faults. When using a RAP, always exit the procedure when the fault is fixed. Do not perform the remaining steps.
Section 3 - lMAGE QUALITY REPAIR ANALYSIS PROCEDURES (RAPS) This section contains the Repair Analysis Procedures (RAPs) necessary to repair copy quality faults. The first RAP, CQl Copy Defect Entry Procedure, is used to classify a copy quality prob- lem and will reference the RAP to be used to repair the problem. When using a RAP, exit the procedure when the fault is fixed. Do not perform the remaining steps.
Section 4 - REPAIRIADJUSTMEMT PROCEDURES This section contains the repair and adjustment procedures for the WorkCentre XD Series fam- ily of copierlprinters (XD100/XD102/XD103flXD104IXDl05flXD120f/XDl25flXD130dfl XD155df).
Section 5 - WRTS LlST This section contains the detailed Parts List for the WorkCentre XD Series family of copier1 printers (XDlOOIXD102/XD1 O3flXDI 04lXD1 05f/XD120f/XD125f/XD130df/XD155df).
4/00 introduction
Workcentre XD SERIES 3 About This Manual, Organization
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Section 6 - GENERAL PROCEDURES1 GENERAL INFORMATION How to Use This Manual This section contains Diagnostic Procedures, Installation and Removal Procedures, and Gen- introduction era1 information which includes Product Specifications for the WorkCentre XD Series family of copierlprinters (XDI 00lXD102lXDI 03f/XD1041XD105f/XD120f/XD125f/XD130df/XD155df). The Service Call Procedures will direct you to the proper section of the Service Manual.
Section 7 - WIRING DATA This section contains PlugIJack Location Drawings and BSDs.
You should beg~n the servlce call w~th the ln~t~al Act~onslSystem Checks Procedure. From there, you w~l l be referred to e~ther Sect~on 2, Status Indicator RAPs or Sect~on 3, Image Qual- ~ t y RAPs
If you are sent to Section 3, you w~ll perform the CQI Copy Defect Entry Procedure to class~fy the copy qual~ty problem. You w~ll then be d~rected to the proper RAP to beg~n your trouble- shoot~ng From these RAPs you may be referred to other sect~ons of the manual to make checks, adjustments, or to replace parts.
When you have made a repalr, return to the System CheckoutIF~nal Act~on to complete the call
Introduction
Organization, How to Use This Manual WorkCentre XD SERIES
Other lnforrnationt The Use of Caution, Warning, and Mote statements Information relative to the completion of a task in a safe or thorough manner w~l l be supplied In the form of a Caut~on, a Warn~ng, or a Note statement These statements are found throughout the service documentat~on.
Cautions, Warnings, and Note statements appear before the steps to which they apply. These statements should be read before continuing to the next step in a procedure.
The definition of a Caution, Warning, or Note is as follows:
Caution - A Caution statement indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to or destruct~on of equipment.
Warning - A Warnlng statement indicates an operating or malntenance procedure, practice, or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury or loss of l~fe
Note - A Note statement indicates an operating or maintenance problem, practice, or condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently.
The Use of Acronyms, Abbreviations, Specific or Unique Terms, and Conventions
Test Pattern 82P524 (NASG & XCL) and 82P523 (XE) will be referred to in this documentation as the Standard Test Pattern.
The Density Output Reference Guide, 82P520, and the Copyllmage Quality Rating Guide, 82P284, will also be referred to in this documentation.
The terms "dry ink" and "tone? are interchangeable.
Conventions The conventions that are used in this service documentation are presented in the table below. Table 2
A list of acronyms and abbreviations used in this service documentation is located in the table below. Table 1
Table 2 Conventions
Table 1 General Acronyms
[nn-nn]
E7-[nn]
bolding
Specific Terms
Hyphenated numbers enclosed in brackets indicate a diagnostic code to be used
When a Statu~s Code has more than one sub- code, the subcode will appear in brackets.
When used in a sentence beginning with "Press the", any bolded numbers or words will represent an actual keypad button on the Control Console.
Workcentre XD SERIES
Introduction
Other information
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Reference Symbology Reference Symbols The reference symbols (icons) used in this documentation denote supportive data which can be found in other sections of this documentation. The purpose of these symbols is to inform the Service Representative of procedures, adjustments, or other information that is important for successful diagnosis and repair.
Schematic Symbols These symbols represent electrical and mechanical components or devices that are commonly found in Xerox equipment. These symbols are included as an aid to understanding the repre- sentations used in the Circuit Diagrams (CDs).
AC and DC Voltage References The expected AC and DC voltage levels found in this machine are defined in this section. These specifications represent the expected range for AC (machine input power source) and DC (machine internal power supplies) voltages that are encountered during normal operation.
Abbreviaf ions The table below lists the electrical wire colors that are identified in this service documentation and reflects the use of standardized abbreviations. Table I
Table 1 Wire Color Abbreviations
Introduction
Reference Symbology
Abbreviation
BLK
BLU
BRN
GRAY
GRN
G N
ORN
PINK
RED
VIO
WHT
YEL
YIG
Workcentre XD SERIES
Wire Color
black
blue
brown
gray green
greenlyellow
orange
pink
red
violet
white
yellow
yellowlgreen
REFERENCE SYMBOLOGY Miscellaneous Symbols
Notes, adjustments, and parts lists support the checklists and the RAP information, ~h~ sym- Descriptions of all commonly used graphic symbols are included in order to help you in trouble-
bols that refer to this supportive data are shown below. shooting when performing the RAP'S.
Note
Adjustments
Parts List
This symbol is used to refer to notes found on the same page
Standby Power Input
This symbol indicates the continuation of a standby power line that is inter- +24 m C rupted in the vertical direction.
Feed Back
ADJ 4.1 This symbol refers to an adjustment procedure located in Section 4 of this Service Documentation. The number adjacent to the symbol indi- This symbol indicates a feedback signal.
cates the number that is assigned to that adjustment
Flag
q0'6 This number refers to the parts list located in section 5 of the Service Manual. The D number after the PL designation indicates the number that is assigned to that parts list.
Switches and Relay Contacts
0 n 0- Safety interlock switch that is open.
Ground
This symbol indicates an area of a Circuit Diagram that you should check.
This symbol indicates a machine ground.
-2G- Safety Interlock swltch that is closed
LEDlPhototransistor Sensor
Th~s type of sensor IS used In the document and paper path. It uses reflected light to swltch the sensor off and on.
Switch or relay contacts with momentary contacts shown normally open.
Switch or relay contacts wtth momentary contacts shown normally closed.
Workcentre XD SERIES
Introduction
Reference Symbology
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Without Tag Change
This symbol indicates that the area to which the triangle points has not been modified by the tag number in the circle.
This symbol indicates that the entire page has not been modified by the tag number in the circle.
With Tag Change
This symbol indicates that the area to which the triangle points has been modified by the tag number in the circle.
This symbol indicates that the entire page has been modified by the tag number in the circle.
A WARNING This symbol is used to warn of possibIe eye damage from a laser beams if service procedures are not foilowed exactly as wr1tfei.n.
CAUTION
This symbol is used when components in the copier are suscep!ibli3 I-o damage h m eiectroslaiic discharge. Observe ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
WARNING A warning is used to alert the personnel to an gapelating or meinte- nance procedure, practice, or condltagan that, if not strictiy observed could result in injury or Boss of life.
CAUBIiON
A caution is used lo alert the personnel io an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition that if not siriciiy observed, could resuit /n damage io, or deslrriclion o f equipmeiii.
Signal Nomenclature The signal is named to imply the condition of the machine when the signal is available. For example:
DOCUMENT JAM SENSED (L) +5 VDC
1 DOCUMENT JAM SENSED=Slgnal Name
2 (L) = Loglc State when the slgnal IS ava~lable In ~ t s named state. In thls case the slgnal IS
Lo when a document jam IS sensed
3 +5 VDC=Loglc level when the slgnal IS HI
DC Voltage Levels DC Voltages should be measured between the test polnt and the rnachlne frame, unless Instructed othetwlse. Table 2
Table 2 DC Voltage Levels
Logic Voltage Levels Measurements of logic levels must be made with reference to the specified ground point, unless some other point is referenced in a diagnostic procedure. Table 3
Table 3 Logic Voltage Levels
Actual Voltage Ranges
+4.8 VDC to +5.2 VDC +5 VDC 0.0 VDC to +1.0 VDC
+22.0 VDC to +25.7 VDC +24 VDC 0.0 VDC to +3.0 VDC
Introduction 4/00 Reference Symbology 8 Workcentre XD SERIES
1 Service Call Procedures lntroduction Introduction .................................................................................................................... 1-3
Copier Maintenance Copier Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 1-4
Initial ActionslSystem Checks .. Initial ActionsISystem Checks ........................................................................................ 1-5
Status Codeslother Faults Listing Status Codeslother Faults Listing .................................................................................. 1-6
System CheckouVFinal Action System CheckoutIFinal Action ....................................................................................... 1-8
Service Call Procedures
Workcentre XD SERIES
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Service Call Procedures 4/00 6 -2 Workcentre XD SERlES
introduction Use the Serv~ce Call Procedures as a maintenance gu~de when perform~ng servlce on the WorkCentre XD Series family of cop~erlprinters (XD1001 XD1021 XD103fl XD1041 XDl O5fl XDl20fl XD125f 1 XD130dfl XD155df) . The procedure has been des~gned to be used wlth the WorkCentre XD Ser~es fam~ly Serv~ce Documentation
Copier Maintenance The maintenancelclean~ng should be performed when the copler IS be~ng serv~ced
initial ActionsISystem Checks This d~agram is des~gned to ~dent~fy and class~fy the copier problem and to refer you to the appropr~ate RAP in order to repalr the problem When the problem has been repalred, perform the System CheckouVFinal Action
System CheckouVFinal Actions Th~s procedure should be completed at the end of every servlce call to ensure that the copy paper and the document are transported properly and to ensure that copy qual~ty is w~ th~n spec~f~cat~on.
WorkCentre XD SERIES
Service Call Procedures
Introduction
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Copier Maintenance introduction The following maintenance procedure should be performed when the copierlprinter is serviced.
Procedure
1. Clean the following parts every time the copierlprinter is serviced ( TBbie 1).
Table 1
1 Description /Procedure 1 Transfer Corotron Wire
Document Glass and SDF Document Glass
Clean the Transfer Corotron Wire using the Corotron Cleaner (see the User Guide).
Clean using water or 43H12 or 431381 Xerox Lens and Mirror Cleaner and a lint-free Cloth. After cleaning, apply one drop of 8R90275 Anti-Static Fluid and spread it evenly from one end of the glass to the other using a lint-free cloth.
2. Perform the Total Copy Count Read procedure in Section 6. Clean the following parts when the total copy count reaches 120,000 ( -Table 2).
Table 2
Description
Document Cover Cushion
Optics Frame interior
Mirrors 1, 2, and 3
Reflector
Exposure Lamp
Lens
Focus Correction Lens (Laser Assembly)
Procedure
Clean using Formula A on a lint-free cloth.
Clean using Formula A on a lint-free cloth.
Clean using Film Remover on a lint-free cloth.
Clean using 43H12 or 43P81 Lens and Mirror Cleaner on a lint- free cloth.
Clean using Film Remover on a lint-free cloth
Clean using Film Remover on a lint-free cloth.
Do not open the Laser Assembly. Gently remove dust or toner deposits from the exposed lens surface with a damp cotton swab.
Transport Roller (Tray 2 Paper Feed Assembly),
3. Perform the Totaal Copy Count Read procedure in Section 6. Lubricate the following when the total copy count reaches 120,000 ( Table 3).
Gently remove any remaining dampness from the cleaned lens with a dry swab.
Clean using Film Remover on a lint-free cloth.
Upper and Lower Regis- tration Rollers, Exit Rollers
Thermistor
Table 3
Clean using Film Remover on a lint-free cloth.
I Heat Roll I Lubricate the gear with 8R983 Fuser Lube.
Description
Mlrror Base Rail
Roll bearings)
Procedure
Apply a th~n film of 70P95 Turb~ne 011 to the upper surface of the rall.
4 Perform the Total Copy Count Read procedure In Section 6. Replace the following parts at the intervals shown In the table ( Table 4).
Table 4
1 herm most at I Clean using Film Remover on a lint-free cloth.
Pressure Roll Str~pper Flngers
Strlpper Flnger (3)
Service Call Procedures . Copier Maintenance Workcentre XD SERIES
1 22N 1 33 (230V)
33N169
7N695
120,000
120,000
PL 6.2
REP 10.1 1
initial Aetions/Svslem Cheeks - SDF PRESENT LED WILL NOT COME ON
Initial Actions 1. QUESTION THE OPERATOR
2. VERIFY, CLASSIFY, AND REPAIR THE PROBLEM
3. REFER TO CUSTOMIZING YOUR COPIER IN THE USER GUIDE AND RECORD THE CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE SETTINGS.
Status Indicators STATUS CODES
Go to the Status CodesiOther Faults Listing
OTHER STATUS INDICATORS (refer to Figure 1 for the locat~ons of LEDs)
- TONER CARTRIDGE LED ON
Go to the Toner Cartridge LED On RAP
- DRUM CARTRIDGE LED ON
Go to the Drum Cartridge LED On RAP - COPIER/PRINTER DOCUMENT JAM LED IS ON
Go to the E2 Status Code (Without SDFj RAP or the E2 S"itus Code RAP (With SDFj
- SDF JAM LED IS ON
Go to the 5 1 SDF JAM LED RAP
Go to the 5.1 SDF JAM LED RAP - SELECTED PAPER TRAY LED IS FLASHING
Go to the 8.1 Paper Tray Ready RAP
Copy Quality Problems Go to the CQI Copy Defect Entry RAP in Section 3
Other Faults COPY COUNT DISPLAY IS BLANK
Go to the 1 .I Power ON RAP (Without SDF) or the I .I Power On RAP (With SDF)
COPIER START PROBLEM
Go to the 1 . I Power ON RAP (Without SDF) or the 1 .I Power On RAP (With SDF)
DEAD MACHINE
Go to the 1 ,1 Power ON RAP (Without SDF) or the 1 . I Power On RAP (With SDF)
* SELECTION/INDICATION PROBLEM
Go to the 2.1 Seiectionilndication RAP (Without SDF) or the 2.1 Seiectionilndication RAP (with SDF)
* SINGLE SHEET BYPASS TRAY PROBLEMS WITHOUT A FAULT CODE
Go to the P Status Code RAP (Wi"ihoul SDF) or the P Status Code RAP (With SDF)
ALL OTHER PROBLEMS
Go to 2. STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
Drum Cartridge LED
SDF Present LED Toner Cartridge LED
Document Jam LED Paper Tray LEDs
Figure 1 Control Panel Indicator LEDs
Workcentre XD SERIES
Service Call Procedures
Initial Actisns/System Checks
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Status Godes/Ot&er Faults Listing Table 1 Status Codes Entry Chart
NOTE: Press the Start button to view the subcode when a status code is displayed on the Control Panel.
Table 1 Status Codes Entry Chart
Status Code
A1
A2
C1
CH
E2
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
Service Call Procedures
Status GodeslOtheu Faults Listing
Status Code
H2
H3
H4
J 1
- J2
Workcentre XD SERIES
Subcode
0 1
03
04
05
12
14
Subcode
exists with the Exposure Lamp or its clr- cuitry, or w~th the exposure lamp driver
[15] Status Code RAP (With SDF)
Description
SDF JAM PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed a jam in the SDF
SDF JAM PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed a jam in the SDF
FRONT OR SIDE DOOR OPEN The Main PWB sensed that either the Front or the Side Door was open
TONER CARTRIDGE PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that the Toner Cartridge was not present
PAPER JAM PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that a paper jam exists wrthin the paper path
MEMORY ERROR The Main PWB sensed that a problem exrsts with the GDI Memory PWB
LASER PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that a problem exists with the Laser Assembly or its cir- cuitry, or with the laser drive circult
CCD WHITE LEVEL PROBLEM The Maln PWB sensed that a problem exists with either the CCD drrve circuit or the Exposure Lamp
CCD BLACK LEVEL PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that a problem exists with the CCD drive circurt
SHADING CORRECTION PROBLEM The Marn PWB sensed that the white value obtalned when the calrbration strip was scanned was incorrect
IMAGE PROCESSING PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed a communication problem between the CPU and the image processing (ASIC) chip
EXPOSURE LAMP PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that a problem
L1
L3
L4
L6
P
U2
Description
THERMISTOR PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that the Ther- mistor RT1 was open
FUSER OVERHEAT PROBLEMThe Main PWB sensed a Fuser overheat condition
FUSER WARM-UP PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that the Fuser did not reach 185" C within 27 seconds after power on or that the Fuser does not rise above 140" C for 6 seconds during the copy cycle.
TONER CARTRIDGE PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that the Toner Cartridge is empty
Corrective Action
Go to A1IA2 Status Code RAP
Go to ,411.42 Status Code RAP
Go to C I Status Code RAP or 61 Status Code RAP
Go to CM Status Code RAP or CH Stat& Code RAP
Go to E2 Status Code (Without SDF) RAP or E2 Status Code RAP (W~th SDF)
Go to E7-[Ol] Status Code RAP
Go to E7 [03] Status Code RAP or E7-1031 Status Code RAP
Go to E7-[04] Status Code RAP or E7-1041 Status Code RAP
Go to E7-1051 Status Code RAP or E7-1051 Status Code RAP (With SDF)
Go to E7-j12j Status Code RAP or E7-1121 Status Code RAP (Wrlh SDF)
Go to E7-jf 41 Status Code RAP
Go to E7-j15j Status Code RAP (Without SDF) or E7-
Corrective Action
Go to H211-13 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) or H21 1-13 Status Code RAP (With SSDF)
Go to H21113 Status Code RAP (Wllhout SDF) or H21 1-13 Status Code RAP (With SDF)
Go to M4 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) or H4 Status Code RAP (With SDF)
Go to J I Status Code RAP (Wrthoul SDF) or 31 Stat~rs Code RAP (With SDF)
01
tridge has reached the end of its l~fe
SCAN PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that the Exposure Lamp Carriage did not leave the home position after power up or after the Start button was pressed
SCAN RETURN PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed that the Exposure Lamp Carriage did not return home after power up or after the copy cycle
MAIN MOTOR PROBLEM The Main PWB sensed a Main Drive Motor MOT1 problem
LASER PROBLEM The Maln PWB sensed that the Laser Assembly polygon motor failed to achreve the correct operating speed after power up or after the Start button IS pressed
PAPER FEED PROBLEMThe Main PWB sensed that the selected paper tray IS out of paper or that a misfeed has occurred
MEMORY FAILURE The Main PWB sensed a memory failure
Go to 11:13 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) or L1/ L3 Status Code RAP (With SDF)
Go to 11/13 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) or ill 13 Status Code RAP (Wrth SDF)
Go to 14 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) or i 4 Status Code RAP (With SDF)
Go to L6 Status Code RAP or 16 Status Code RAP (With SDF)
Go to P Status Code RAP (W~thout SDF) or P Status Code RAP (With SDFJ
GO to U2- jOl j / U2-[04j Status Code RAP
4/00 Service Call Procedures
Workcentre XD SERIES 1-7 Status Codedother Faults Listing
Table 1 Status Codes Entry Chart Status Code
U2
Subcode
04
Description
MEMORY FAILURE The Main PWB sensed an access error.
Corrective Action
GO to U2-[Ol] / U2-[04] Status Code RAP.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
System Gheckout/Final Action Procedure Make several copies of the 82P524 Test Pattern side A. (Include 78%, 86%, 129%, and 200%.) Use the alternate tray where applicable. Copies are delivered to the output tray. V N
1 Refer to initial AclionsiSystem Checks to begin your repair.
Evaluate the copies using CQ1 Copy Defect Entry RAP Image quality is acceptable. V N
1 Go to the copy quality RAP identified by the CQI Copy Defect Entry RAP.
Clean the exterior of the machine and provide copy samples of the customers originals.
Service Call Procedures
System CheckouVFinal Action Workcentre XD SERIES
2 STATUS INDICATOR RAPS A11A2 Status Code RAP .............................................................................................. CH Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ............................................................................ CH Status Code RAP (With SDF) ......................... .... ................................................ C1 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ............................ .. ............................................. C1 Status Code RAP (With SDF) .................................................................................... E2 Status Code (Without SDF) RAP ..................... .. .................................................... E2 Status Code RAP (With SDF) ....................................................................................
.............................................................................................. E7-[Ol] Status Code RAP E7-[03] Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ...................................................................... E7-1031 Status Code RAP (With SDF) ............................................................................. E7-[04] Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ....................................................................... E7-1041 Status Code RAP (With SDF) ............................................................................
...................... ............................................ E7-[05] Status Code RAP (Without SDF) .. E7-[05] Status Code RAP (With SDF) ................... .. ................................................... E7-[12] Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ........................................................................ E7-[I 21 Status Code RAP (With SDF) ............................................................................. E7-[I 41 Status Code RAP ............................................................................................... E7-[I 51 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ........................................................................ E7-1151 Status Code RAP (With SDF) ............................................................................. H21H3 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ...................... .. ............................................ H2lH3 Status Code RAP (With SDF) ........................................................................... 1-14 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ................ .. .......................................................... H4 Status Code RAP (With SDF) ................................................................................... J l Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ............................................................................... J1 Status Code RAP (With SDF) .................................................................................... J2 Status Code RAP ....................................................................................................... Ll lL3 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ........................................................................ LlIL3 Status Code RAP (With SDF) ..................................... ... ....................................... L4 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ............................................................................... L4 Status Code RAP (With SDF) ................................................................................... L6 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ............................................................................... L6 Status Code RAP (With SDF) .................................................................................... P Status Code RAP (Without SDF) ................................................................................. P Status Code RAP (With SDF) .................................................................................... U2-[OI] I U2-1041 Status Code RAP ...................... .. .................................................... Drum Cartridge LED On RAP ......................................................................................... Toner Cartridge LED On RAP .................... .. ................................................................ 1 . 1 Power ON RAP (Without SDF) ............................................................................... 1 . 1 Power On RAP (With SDF) ..................................... ... ............................................... 1.2 DC Power RAP (Without SDF) ................................................................................ 1.2 DC Power (With SDF) .............................................................................................. 2.1 Selection/lndication RAP (Without SDF) ................................................................... 2.1 Selection/lndication RAP (with SDF) ....................................................................... 2.2 Selection RAP (Without SDF) .................................................................................
... 2.2 Selection RAP (With SDF) ...................................................................................... 4.1 Ventilation Fan Motor RAP (Without SDF) ...................... .. ................................... 4.1 Ventilation Fan Motor RAP (With SDF) ..................................................................... 5.1 SDF JAM LED RAP ..................................................................................................
............................................................................................ 2-3 8.1 Paper Tray Ready RAP 2-68 2-6 2-6 2-7 2-7 2-8
2-11 2-14 2-14 2-15 2-15 2-16 2-16 2-17 2-17 2-18 2-18 2-19 2-19 2-20 2-22 2-24 2-26 2-28 2-30 2-32 2-34 '
2-36 2-38 2-39 2-40 2-40 2-42 2-44 2-46 2-46 2-47 2-48 2-50 2-52 2-54 2-56 2-58 2-60 2-62 2-64 2-65 2-66
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS 4/00 2-2 Workcentre XD SERIES
A1/A2 Status Code RAP ~ n t e r the diagnostic code [2-21. Using a strip of paper, actuate the SDF Document Path Sen- sor Q3. The machine Jam indicator lamp comes on.
A l , indicates the Main PWB sensed an SDF jam. (The last document should be fed again.) Y N Go to Flag 2 check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the SDF
A2, indicates the Main PWB sensed an SDF jam. (the last 2 documents should be fed again,) Document Path Sensor Q3, PL 9.3, PL 9.4.
Procedure I The machine is equipped with a Duplex SDF.
Clear the document jam. Open and close the SDF Feed Assembly Press the C button The Y N jam can be cleared. 1 Clean and or check for the following. Y N 1 Obstructions ~n the paper path
1 The SDF Jam LED is flashing. 1 2. Extt Drlve Belt, PL 9.3
/ 3 Transport Roller, PL 9 3 Enter the diagnostic code 12-21. Open and then close the SDF Feed Assembly. 1 4 Exlt roller, PL 9.3 1 / The SDF Misfeed indicator comes on and goes off.
)stlc code rz-51. The DSDF Transport Roll Clutch CL1, can be heard lisengaging.
I I Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an intermittent condition. if the problem still / Perform the following.
exists replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. 1 1. Go to Flag 5 and check the wires for and open or short circuit. I 1 2. Check the mechanical components on the output of the Transport Roll Clutch, PL
1 GO to Flag 2 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are good, 9.4.
replace the SDF Document Path Sensor Q3, PL 9.3, PL 9.4. I 3. If the problem still exists, replace the DSDF Transport Roll Clutch CLI, PL 9.4 I i I Place a document in the SDF tray. Press the Start button. The document is fed into the document path. Y N
/ Enter the diagnostic code [2-31. The SDF Drive Motor comes on. I Y N I 1 1 Go to Flag 3 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace 1 I the SDF Drive Motor, PL 9.3, PL 9.4. j I j : I Enter the diagnostic code [2-41. The SDF Feed Solenoid cycles on and off. I Y N
/ Go to Flag 4 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are good, ' replace the SDF Feed Solenoid SOL1, PL 9.2. I i I I I ~ w ~ t c h off the power Remove the SDF Rear Cover and check the SDF Drlve Motor and 1 dr~ve components for wear and or damage. The Motor and drive components are
good. Y N
1 Replace the defective components PL 9.3, PL 9.4
1 Check the followmg for wear and or damage PL 9 3. j Feed solenotd llnkage PL 9.2 i i * Feed and Retard rolls PL 9.2 I Feed Clutch and drlve PL 9 2 i I The document stops before the Exit roller. Y N
/ Clean and check the document path for obstructtons
Enter the diagnostic code [2-61. The DSDF Exit Pinch Rolls pulse up and down. Y N
I Perform the following. I 1. Go to Flag 6 and check the wires for and open or short circuit. I 1 2. Check the mechanical linkage on the output of the DSDF Exit Roll Solenoid, PL 9.4.
/ 3. If the problem still exists, replace the DSDF Exit Roll Solenoid SOL 2, PL 9.4 I Enter the diagnostic code [2-71. The DSDF Deflection Gate Solenoid SOL3 moves up and down. Y N
Perform the following. 1 1 . Go to Flag 7 and check the wires for and open or short circuit.
1 2. Check the mechanical linkage on the output of the DSDF Deflection Gate Solenoid
I SOL3, PL 9.4.
/ 3. If the problem still exists, replace the DSDF Deflection Gate Solenoid SOL3, PL9.4.
Clean and or check for the following: 1. Obstructions in the paper path
2. Exit Drive Belt, PL 9.4
3. Transport Roller, PL 9.4
4. Exit roller, PL 9.4
Workcentre XD SERIES
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
A1/A2 Status Code RAP
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
IPL 7.1
Docuineiit In SDF Tray 12-*1 PiJ52 I i \ +RVnc
PL 9 2 , - I
BLU 1 . > ,-,. I !
Documeiit at SDF Documnet Path 1 12-21 Sensor 0 3 (1) +5 VDC
7; BRN e I I I 1 2 VDC I
DC COM
GRY t
'OTE 0 SIGNAL READS APPROXIMATELY 22-C TO GND WHEN THE MOTOR IS OPERATING
Figure 1 A1IA2 Status Code
SDF Feed Solenoid On
[ ] L ) + X " D C I P,JZ
RED
Document Cover Closed Sensor
/ SDF Sensor
SDF Feed Solenoid SOL 1
SDF Dociimeilt Path Sensor
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
AI/A2 Status Code RAP Workcentre XD SERIES
r - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
I (MACHINES WITH DUPLEX SDF ONLY) I
I I
ivlPSi\i PWB P L 7 1
CN1 I I I I I I
+?4 VDC
I
DSDF Transport Roll Clutch
DSDF TRANSPORT ROLL CLUTCH CL1
16
15 RED
_1-- +?4 VDC
- SDF Deflectlon Gate Solenold
DSDF DEFLECTION GATE SOLENOID SOL3
I
I I I I I I I I I I I
DSDF Deflectlon Gate Solenold SOL3
I
DSOF Exit Roll \ I
Solenoid SOL2 I
I \ p i j ~ q DSDF Transport Roll Clutch
CL1 (uiicier SOL?)
Figure 2 DSDF Drive Components
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
AI/A2 Status Code RAP
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
CH Status Code RAP (Without SDF) CH Status Code RAP (With SDF) The Main PWB sensed that the Toner Cartridge is not present or fully seated. The Main PWB sensed that the Toner Cartridge is not present or fully seated.
NOTE: I f the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the lnitial Actions correct Main PWB connector numbers. Ensure that the 2 locating pins on the rear of the toner cartridge are not broken.
initial Actions Ensure that the 2 locating pins on the rear of the toner cartridge are not broken.
Remove and reinstall the Toner Cartridge. If problem still exists, go to Flag 1 and check for an open or short circuit. If problem still exists, replace the Main PWB PL 7.1 ..
Cartridae LOW TONE
i! DCCOM 4 {% I GRY
TONER CARTRIDGE
PlJ9
MAlN PWB
REAR VIEW
Figure 1 Toner Cartridge installed (Without SDF)
Remove and reinstall the Toner Cartridge If problem st111 ex~sts, go to Flag 1 and check for a short c~rcu~t If problem st111 exists, replace the Maln PWB PL 7 1
TONER CARTRIDGE
PIJ9
REAR VIEW
MAlN PWB
C N l l
Figure 1 Toner Cartridge Installed (With SDF)
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
CH Status Gode RAP, GH Status Gode RAP VVorkCentre XD SERIES
C1 Status Code RAP (With SDF) C1 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) The Main PWB sensed that the Side Door is open.
MOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.
Procedure Ensure that the Side Door is closed securely. There is +24 VDC measured at 6N107-2 on the Main PWB to GND. Y N
1 There is +24 VDC measured art CN107-1 to GND. i Y N ! Replace the Main PWB PL 7.1. 1 I 8 I 8 3
! Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the check is good replace the Side
j Door Detector Switch Assembly PL 5.3. I
Replace the Main PWB PL 7.1
SlDE DOOR INTERLOCK 53 PL 5 3
%,'A RED
I
The Main PWB sensed that the Side Door is open.
Procedure Ensure that the S~de Door IS closed securely. There is +24 VDC measured at CN103-2 on the Main PWB to GND. Y PI I There is 924 VDG measured at GN103-11 to GNB. ) Y M I I Replace the Maln PWB PL 7 1 I
/ Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the check is good replace the Side
I Door Detector Switch Assembly PL 5.3.
Replace the Main PWB PL 7.1.
I I J
RED
I I
Figure 1 +24 VDC Interlock Ckt. (With SDF)
Figure 1 +24 VDC Interlock Ckt. (Without SDF)
Workcentre XD SERIES
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
C1 Status Code RAP, C1 Status Code RAP
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
E2 Status Code (Without SDF) RAP The Main PWB sensed a tray misfeed or a paper jam in the paper path
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main P WB connector numbers.
initial Actions Switch off the power and clear any document jam.
Check for any obstructions in the paper path.
Procedure Switch on the power. Enter diagnostic code [30-I]. Open then close the Fuser Gate to actuate and deactuate the Fuser Jam Sensor Q3 while observing the Paper Jam lamp. The Paper Jam lamp comes on and goes off. Y N
Go to Flag 4 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are good, 1 replace the Fuser Jam Sensor Q3 PL 6.1. I I Manually actuate and deactuate the Paper Feed Sensor Q1 while observing the Toner Car- tridge lamp. The Toner Cartridge lamp comes on and goes off. Y N
Go to Flag 1 and check for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Paper Feed Sensor Q1 PL 5.1.
For machines with a Tray 2. Open the Lower Side Door and manually actuate the Tray 2 Feed Sensor Q7. The Tray 2 LED goes off and comes on. Y N
/ Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for an open or a short circuit. If the wires are good,
1 replace the Tray 2 Feed Sensor Q7, PL 5.8.
I Place a piece of paper above the Fuser Gate and use the Manual Exit Knob to move the paper across the Exit Sensor 0 4 while observing the Drum Cartridge Lamp. The Drum Cartridge lamp turns on and off.
Y N
1 Go to Flag 5 and check for an open or short wire. If the wires are good, replace the Exit 1 Sensor Q4 PL 6.3. i Manually actuate and deactuate the Single Sheet Bypass Feed Sensor Q2 while observing the Auto exposure lamp. The Auto exposure LED comes on and goes off.
Y N I Go to Flag 3 and check for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Single Sheet I
Bypass Feed Sensor Q2 PL 5.2. I
Press the Clear button. Enter diagnostic code [6-21. Press the Start button. The Registra- tion Roll Solenoid can be heard engaging and disengaging. Y N
j Press the Clear button. There is +24 VDC measured between CN103-1 and GND on j the Main PWB.
I
I ' f N 1 1 Replace the Main PWB PL 7.1. I 1 I I Go to Flag 6 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the
1 Registration Roll Solenoid SOL3, PL 2.2.
Press the Stop button Paper jams in the fuser. Y N I Check the followtng
I - Ensure that the paper tray gu~de IS set to the correct wldth of the copy paper
1 lnspect the paper path from thls tray and the paper regtstratton area for an obstruc- tlon such as a burr
I * lnspect the Reglstrat~on Roll, PL 5 1 and the Plnch Roll, PL 1 4 for contamrnat~on 1 and wear. Clean (wlth F~lm Remover only) or replace as requlred
1 Check the condition of the Pressure Sprlngs, PL 1 4 to ensure that they are applylng even tens~on
Check the following: A deformed Pressure Roller, PL 6.2.
An obstruction in the Fuser.
A binding Registration Roll Solenoid, PL 2.2.
A broken Fuser Drive Gear, PL 6.1 and PL 2.2
A broken or dislocated tray 2 Arm, PL 5.7
CN104
Figure 1 Main PWB (Without SDF)
"
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
E2 Status Code (Without SBF) RAP
MAIN PWB
PNK
Figure 2 E2 Status Code (Without SDF)
Single Sheet Bypass Feed Sensor Q2
Paper Feed Sensor Q1
\ Tray 2 Feed Sensor 07
Workcentre XD SERIES
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
E2 Status Code (Without SDF) RAP
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
I . I
PNK
EXIT SENSOR Q4 PL 6.3 Paper At
PNK
Exit Sensor Q4
J- +24 VDC
RED -
P/J$ PC7 PIJS Registration Roll Solenoid SOL-3
Figure 3 E2 Fuser and Exit Jam (Without SDF)
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS 4/00 E2 Status Code (Without SDF) RAP 2-1 o Workcentre XD SERIES
NlAiN PWB PL71
Duplex SDF Only)
Figure 2 E2 Fuser and Exit jams
Workcentre XD SERIES
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
E2 Status Code RAP (With SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
E7-[Ol] Status Code RAP The Main PWB sensed a GDI Memory PWB error.
Procedure Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The E7-[01] Status Code still exists. Y N
1 Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur. I Switch off the power. Disconnect the power cord. Check for a loose or intermittent connection of the GDI Memory PWB to CN108 on the Main PWB. Reconnect the power cord and switch on the power. The E7-[01] Status Code still exists. V N
/ Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur.
1 Replace the GDI Memory PWB PL 7.1. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB PL 7.1.
MAIN PWB
ONLY)
GDI NIeinoiy P W ~ CNlOS
Figure 1 GDI Memory PWB
E7-LO31 Status Code RAP (Without SBF) The Main PWB sensed a Laser Output error.
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.
Procedure Switch off the power. Ensure that the Side Door is closed securely. Switch on the power. The E7-1031 Status Code still exists. V N
i Run several coples to ensure the problem does not reoccur.
There is +5 VDC measured from CN107-3 to GND V N
1 There is +5 VDC measured from CN107-4 to GND. i ! V N I 1 Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. I I 1 b o to Flag 1. Check the The wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the
Side Door Interlock Switch S4, PL 5.3.
Perform the following: * Check the connector CN115 on the Main PWB and the Laser Harness PL 3.2 to the
Laser Module for an open or intermittent condition.
If the connections and wires are good replace the Laser Module, PL 3.3.
If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
SIDE DOOR INTERLOCK S4 1 W i 3
3~ +5VDC
ORN
1 1 T I
C N l l
CN107
Figure 1 Side door interlock SW.
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS 4/00 E7-[Ol] Status Code RAP, E7-[03] Status Code RAP 2-1 4 Workcentre XD SERIES
E2 Status Code RAP (With SDF) The Main PWB sensed a tray misfeed or a paper jam in the paper path.
initial Actions Sw~tch off the power and clear any document jam - Check for any obstructions in the paper path.
Procedure Switch on the power. Enter d~agnostic code [30-11. Open then close the Fuser Gate to actuate and deactuate the Fuser Jam Sensor Q3 whlle observing the Paper Jam lamp. The Paper Jam lamp comes on and goes off. Y N
1 Go to Flag 4 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are good,
1 replace the Fuser Jam Sensor Q3 PL 6.1. 1 Manually actuate and deactuate the Paper Feed Sensor Q1, while observing the Toner Car- tr~dge lamp. The Toner Cartridge lamp comes on and goes off. Y N j Go to Flag 1 and check for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Paper Feed I Sensor Ql PL 5.1. I For machines with a Tray 2. Open the Lower Side Door and manually actuate the Tray 2 Feed Sensor Q7. The Tray 2 LED goes off and comes on. V N
: Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for an open or a short circuit. If the wires are good,
/ replace the Tray 2 Feed Sensor Q7, PL 5.8.
Place a piece of paper above the Fuser Gate and use the Manual Exit Knob to move the paper across the Exit Sensor Q4 while observing the Drum Cartridge Lamp. The Drum Cartridge lamp turns on and off.
V N I Go to Flag 5 and check for an open or short circuit.If the wires are good, replace the Exit 1 Sensor Q4 PL 6.3.
Manually actuate and deactuate the Single Sheet Bypass Feed Sensor Q2 wh~le observing the Auto exposure lamp. The Auto exposure LED comes on and goes off. Y M
a Go to Flag 3 and check for an open circuit If the wires are good, replace the Single Sheet I
Bypass Sensor Q2 PL 5.2.
1 Press the Clear button Enter d~agnostic code [6-21 Press the Start button. The Registra- tion Roll Solenoid can be heard engaging and disengaging. Y N
I Press the Clear button. There is +24 VBC measured between CNI07-I and GND on i the Main PWB.
Replace the Ma~n PWB PL 7 1
I 1 Go to Flag 6 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are good, I replace the Registration Roll Solenoid SOL3, PL 2.2. i
Press the Stop button. Paper jams in the fuser. Y M
i Check the following:
1 Ensure that the paper tray guide is set to the correct width of the copy paper.
1 Inspect the paper path from this tray and the paper registration area for an obstruc- I tion such as a burr.
j Inspect the Registration Roll, PL 5.1 and the Pinch Roll, PL 1.4 for contamination 1 and wear. Clean (with Film Remover only) or replace as required. I I Check the condition of the Registration Pinch Roll Springs, PL 1.4 to ensure that I I they are applying even tension. I
The machine has a duplex SDF. Y N
1 Check the following:
1 A deformed Pressure Roller, PL 6.2. I An obstruction in the Fuser. i ! A binding Registration Roll Solenoid, PL 2.2. I 1 * A broken Fuser Drive Gear PL 6.1 and PL 2.2.
A defective Exit Drive Belt PL 2.1 1 A broken Exit Roller or Lower Transport Roller PL 2.1. i I
@ A loose or broken Lower Side Door Arm PL 5.7.
Enter the diagnostic code [25-I]. Press the Start button. Both the Main Drive Motor and the Exit Drive Motor come on. V N
1 Press the Stop button. Go to Flag 7 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires I are good, replace the Exit Drive Motor MOT5 PL 2.1.
I Check the following:
A deformed Pressure Roller, PL 6.2. * An obstruction in the Fuser.
A binding Registration Roll Solenoid, PL 2.2.
A broken Fuser Drive Gear PL 6.1 and PL 2.2.
A broken Exit Roller or Lower Transport Roller PL 2.1.
A defective Exit Drive Belt PL 2.1.
*- h.
WorkCentre XD SERIES
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
E% Status Code RAP (With SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Paper At Bypass
S~ngle Sheet Bypass Feed
r Q 2
Paper Feed Sensor Q I Tray 2 Feed
Sensor Q7
Figure 1 E2 Status Code (with SDF)
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
E2 Status Code RAP (With SDF) Workcentre XD SERIES
E7-[03] Status Code RAP (With SDF) The Main PWB sensed a Laser Output error.
Procedure Swttch off the power Ensure that the Side Door IS closed securely. Swltch on the power. The E7-[03] Status Code still exists. Y N I Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur.
i There is +5 VDC measured from CN103-3 to GND. Y N
; There is +5 VDC measured from CN103-4 to GND. l Y N I I Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. I I 1 Go to Flag 1. Check the The wires for an open c~rcuit If the wires are good, replace the 1 S~de Door Interlock Switch S4, PL 5.3
Perform the following: Check the connector CN119 on the Main PWB and the Laser Harness PL 3.2 to the Laser Module for an open or intermittent condition.
If the connections and wires are good replace the Laser Module, PL 3.3.
If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
SIDE DOOR INTERLOCK S4 / PLII
MAIN PWB I lpLIlI ICN103 3~ +SVDC
ORN
I T I
C N l l
E7-[04] Status Code RAP (Without SDF) The Main PWB senses a CCD white level error.
NOTE: I f the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.
Procedure Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The E7-1041 Status Code still exists. Y N
I Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur. ! Check the connector CN121 on the Main PWB and the ribbon cable going to the CCD PWB for an open or intermittent condition. If the connections are good replace the LensJCCD Module PL 3.2. If the problem still exists, replace the Exposure Lamp Carriage PL 3.1. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB PL 7.1.
Figure 1 Main PWB (Without SDF)
Workcentre XD SERIES 4/00 STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
2-1 5 E7-6033 Status Code RAP, E7-[04] Status Code RAP
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
E7-1041 Status Code RAP (With SDF) The Main PWB senses a CCD white level error.
Procedure Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The E7-[04] Status Code still exists. Y N i Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur. I
Check the connector CN121 on the Main PWB and the ribbon cable going to the CCD PWB for an open or intermittent condition. If the connections are good replace the LensICCD Module PL 3.2. If the problem still exists, replace the Exposure Lamp Carriage PL 3.1. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB PL 7.1.
CNl I
MAIN PWB
ONLY)
I " +
E7-[05] Status Code RAP (Without SDF) The Main PWB sensed a CCD black level error.
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.
Procedure
Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The €7-[05] Status Code still exists. Y N
Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur.
Check the connector CN121 on the Main PWB and the r~bbon cable going to the CCD PWB for an open or Intermittent cond~t~on. If the connections are good replace the LensICCD Module PL 3 2 If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB PL 7 1.
Figure 1 Main PWB (Without SDF)
Figure 1 Main PWB (With SDF)
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS 4/00 E7-1041 Status Code RAP, E7-[05] Status Code RAP 2-1 6 Workcentre XD SERIES
E7-1851 Status Code RAP (With SDF) The Main PWB sensed a CCD black level error.
Procedure
Sw~tch off the power. Switch on the power. The E7-[05] Status Gode still exists. V N
/ Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur.
Check the connector CN124 on the Ma~n PWB and the ribbon cable going to the CCD PWB for an open or lnterm~ttent condition If the connections are good replace the LensJCCD Module PL 3 2. If the problem stdl exlsts, replace the Maln PWB PL 7 1
MAIN PWB
I, n ONLY) . -. -. -. -. ,
. , , I - - I"," B- . - i
E7-[I21 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) The Main PWB sensed a CCD shading level error.
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.
Procedure
Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The E7-[12] Status Code still exists. V N
/ Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur.
Check the connector CN121 on the Main PWB and the ribbon cable going to the CCD PWB for an open or intermittent condition. If the connections are good replace the LensICCD Module PL 3.2. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB PL 7.1.
Figure 1 Main PWB (Without SDF) Figure 1 Main PWB (With SDF)
Workcentre XD SERIES 4/00 STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
2-1 7 E7-6051 Status Code RAP (With SDF), E7-1121 Status
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
E7-1121 Status Code RAP (With SDF) The Main PWB sensed a CCD shading level error.
E7-[I 41 Status Code RAP The Main PWB sensed an ASIC communication error.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The E7-[I21 Status Code still exists. Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The E7-[14] Status Code still exists. V N V N
I Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur. / Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur. I I
Check the connector CN124 on the Main PWB and the ribbon cable going to the CCD PWB Replace the Main PWB PL 7.1. for an open or intermittent condition. If the connections are good replace the LensICCD Module PL 3.2. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB PL 7.1.
Figure 1 Main PWB (With SDF)
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS 4/00 E7-[I21 Status Code RAP (With SDF), E7-[I41 Status 2-1 8
E7-[I51 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) The Main PWB sensed a Copy Lamp problem.
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Ma~n PWB connector numbers.
Procedure
Enter the diagnostrc code [l-I]. Press the Start button. When the Exposure Carriage is approx~mately half way through the scan, press the Stop button Check that the mirrors on the Exposure Lamp Carriage and the Half Rate Carriage are not broken or out of posit~on The mirrors are good. Y N I Replace the defective Component, PL 3 1 I I
Swrtch off the power. Switch on the power. The E7-[15] Status Code still exists. Y N
Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur.
Check the connector CN118 on the Main PWB and the ribbon cable going to the Exposure Lamp Carriage PL 3.1, for an open or intermittent condition. If the cable is good, replace the Main PWB PL 7.1. If the problem still exists, replace the Exposure Lamp Carriage PL 3.1
E7-[I51 Status Code RAP (With SDF) The Main PWB sensed a Copy Lamp problem.
Procedure
Enter the diagnostic code [l-I]. Press the Start button. When the Exposure Carriage is approximately half way through the scan, press the Stop button. Check that the mirrors on the Exposure Lamp Carriage and the Half Rate Carriage are not broken or out of position. The mirrors are good. V N
Replace the defective Component, PL 3.1.
Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The E7-[I51 Status Code still exists. Y N
1 Run several copies to ensure the problem does not reoccur.
i Check the connector CN121 on the Main PWB and the ribbon cable going to the Exposure Lamp Carriage PL 3.1, for an open or intermittent condition. If the cable is good, replace the Main PWB PL 7.1. If the problem still exists, replace the Exposure Lamp Carriage PL 3.1.
Figure 1 Main PWB (With SDF)
Figure 1 Main PWB (Without SDF)
VIIorkCentre XD SERIES 4/00 STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
2-1 9 E7-[I51 Status Code RAP (Without SDF), E7-[I51
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
H21H3 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) H2, indicates that the Main PWB sensed a fuser overheat condition (Thermistor RTI open).
H3, indicates that the Main PWB sensed a fuser overheat condition.
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.
Procedure The Status Code is an, H3. K N
Go to Flag 1 and check for an open wire. If the wires are good replace the Thermistor RTI, PL 6.1. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. If the problem continues, replace the Power Supply PWB, PL 7.1.
i Connect the meter between CN109-17 (+) on the Main PWB and GND (refer to Flag 4) There is 1.2 VDC present while an H3 status code is displayed. K N I 1 NOTE: An H3/H4 status code must be cleared in diagnostics before the copier becomes 1 operational again. I
Enter Diagnostic code 14 to clear the H3 status code. Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The H3 status code appears within 5 seconds after power on. K N
The Ventilation Fan Motor MOT3 is running. I Y N 1 I Go to the 4.1 Ventilation Fan Motor RAP (Without SDF).
I Check the Thermistor RTI, PL 6.1 for contamination. If OK, replace the Power Sup- / ply PWB PSl, PL 7.1. i
8 '
i Go to Flag 1 and check the Thermistor circuit for a short circuit to ground. If OK, replace
I the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
I Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. If problem still exists, replace the Power Supply PWB PSI, PL 7.1.
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
HaH3 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) Workcentre XD SERIES
Figure 1 Fuser Heat (Without SDF)
4/00 STATUS lNDlCATOR RAPS
Workcentre XD SERIES 2-21 H2/H3 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
H2JH3 Status Code RAP (With SDF) H2, indicates that The Main PWB sensed a fuser overheat condition (that the thermistor RTl was open).
H3, indicates that the Main PWB sensed a fuser overheat condition.
Procedure The Status Code is an, H3. Y N
Go to Flag 1 and check for an open wire. If the wires are good replace the Thermistor RT1, PL 6.1. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. If the problem
I continues, replace the Power Supply PWB, PL 7.1.
I Connect the meter between CN101-17 (+) on the Main PWB and GND (refer to Flag 4). There is 1.2 VDC present while an H3 status code is displayed. Y N
1 NOTE: An H3/H4 status code must be cleared in diagnostics before the copier becomes I operational again.
Enter Diagnostic code 14 to clear the H3 status code. Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The H3 status code appears within 5 seconds after power on. Y N
I The Ventilation Fan Motor MOT3 is running. / Y N
Go to the 4.1 Ventilation Fan Motor RAP (With SDF).
I ;heck the Thermistor RT1, PL 6.1 for contamination. If OK, replace the Power Sup-
/ ply PWB PSI, PL 7.1.
% 8
1 Go to Flag 1 and check the Thermistor circuit for a short circuit to ground. If OK, replace 1 the Main PWB, PL 7.1. ! Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. If problem still exists, replace the Power Supply PWB PSI, PL 7.1.
STATUS lNDlCATOR RAPS 4/00
H21H3 Status Code RAP (With SDF) 2-22 Workcentre XD SERIES
Fuser Power On
HZ = THERMISTOR IS OPEN H3 = FUSER OVERHEATS 1-14 = FUSER DOES NOT WARPA UP WITHIN 27 SECONDS.
WHEN AN H OR L STATUS CODE IS PRESENT, THE POWER RELAY SiGNAi GOES HIGH REMOVING POWER TO THE FUSER
ACH = 115 VAC (60HZ) = 2201240 VAC (501 MAIN PWB JUO [wim ror
ONLY)
n CZzJ
r2 F U B 9 . .
Figure 1 Fuser heat (With SDF)
4/00 STATUS INDICATOR RAPS WorkCentre XD SERIES 2-23 H21H3 Status Code RAP (With SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
H4 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) The Main PWB sensed that the fuser did not reach 185" C within 27 seconds after power on or that the fuser dropped below 140" C for 6 seconds during the copy cycle.
NOTE: An H3/H4 status code must be cleared in diagnostics before the copier becomes oper- ational again.
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.
Procedure Switch off the Power. Disconnect the connector, PlJ6 from the Fuser assembly. Connect the meter on the machine side P/J6 between pins 1 and 2 (refer to Flag 3). Set the multimeter to measure AC. Enter diagnostic code [5-21. When the Start button is pressed the machine input line voltage is measured for approximately 5 seconds. V N
/ Reconnect connector PIJ6. Press the Stop button. Connect the DC Meter between I CN109-16 and GND. Press the Start button. The meter switches from +24 VDC to O 1 VDC for 5 seconds. ' Y N
Go to Flag 2 and check the wire for an open or short circuit. The wire is good.
Repair the wire or replace the DC harness, PL 7.1.
I ' 1 Replace the Power Supply PWB PSI, PL 7.1 I I I / Replace the Power Supply PWB PSI, PL 7.1 I Connect the meter between CN109-17 (+) on the Main PWB and GND (refer to Flag 4). Enter diagnostic code [14]. There is approximately 1.2 VDC present. V N I Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. If problem still exists, replace the Power Supply PWB 1 PSI, PL 7.1. I Switch off the power. Set the multimeter to the 200 ohm range. Measure the Fuser side of the connector PlJ6 between pins 1 and 2. There is 1.7 ohms + or - 0.5 ohms measured between pins 1 and 2 of PIJ 6. V N
Remove the Fuser Assembly. Check the continuity of the Thermostat and the Heat Rod
I V N I / Replace the defective component, PL 6.1.
I Reinstall the Fuser Assembly. If the problem still exists, replace the Fuser Assembly, PL
Reconnect PlJ6. Switch on the power. If the problem still exists, replace the Power Supply PWB PS1, PL 7.1.
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
H4 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)
BLK
I I I I VIO t BLK I
HZ = THERMISTOR IS OPEIN 0 H3 = FUSER OVERHEATS H4 = FUSER DOES NOT WARM UP WITHIN 27 SECONDS.
WHEN AN H OR L STATUS CODE IS @ PRESENT, THE POWER RELAY SIGNAL GOES HIGH REMOVING POWER TO THE FUSER
ACH = 115 VAC (60HZ) @ = 220D40 VAC ,OH,)
Figure 1 Fuser Heat (Without SDF)
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
H4 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
H4 Status Code RAP (With SDF) The Main PWB sensed that the fuser did not reach 185" C within 27 seconds after power on or that the fuser dropped below 140" C for 6 seconds during the copy cycle.
NOTE: An H3/H4 status code must be cleared in diagnostics before the copier becomes oper- ational again.
Procedure Switch off the Power. Disconnect the connector, PIJ6 from the Fuser assembly. Connect the meter on the machine side PIJ6 between pins 1 and 2 (refer to Flag 3). Set the multimeter to measure AC. Enter diagnostic code [5-21. When the Start button is pressed the machine input line voltage is measured for approximately 5 seconds. Y N
/ Reconnect connector PlJ6. Press the Stop button. Connect the DC Meter between / CN101-16 and GND. Press the Start button. The meter switches from +24 VDC to O 1 VDC b r 5 seconds.
V N
1 Go to Flag 2 and check the wire for an open or short circuit. The wire is good.
Repair the wire or replace the DC harness, PL 7.1. I 1 Replace the Power Supply PWB PSI, PL 7.1 I I 3 6
1 Replace the Power Supply PWB PSI, PL 7.1.
I Connect the meter between CN101-17 (+) on the Main PWB and GND (refer to Flag 4). Enter diagnostic code [14]. There is approximately 1.2 VDC present. Y N I Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. If problem still exists, replace the Power Supply PWB I i PSI, PL 7.1. I Switch off the power. Set the multimeter to the 200 ohm range. Measure the Fuser side of the connector PlJ6 between pins 1 and 2. There is 1.7 ohms + or - 0.5 ohms measured between pins 1 and 2 of PIJ 6. Y N
1 Remove the Fuser Assembly. Check the continuity of the Thermostat and the Heat Rod 1 HTRl . The checks are good.
Y N 1 Replace the defective component, PL 6.1.
1 I j Reinstall the Fuser Assembly. If the problem still exists, replace the Fuser Assembly, PL
Reconnect PlJ6. Switch on the power. If the problem still exists, replace the Power Supply PWB PSI, PL 7.1.
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
H4 Status Code RAP (With SDF) Workcentre XD SERIES
CNlOl
Figure 1 Fuser Heat (With SDF)
Workcentre XB SERIES
STATUS INDlCATOR RAPS
H4 Status Code RAP (With SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
J1 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) J 1, Indicates that the Toner Cartridge is empty.
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.
lnitial Actions Replace the Toner Cartridge. If a problem still exists, continue with the procedure.
NOTE: If the customer complains that the toner cartridge reached its end of life too soon, then instruct the customer that making copies with the document cover open or making copies with high image area coverage, such as photographs, will reduce the life of the toner cartridge.
Procedure Enter diagnostic code [lo]. The Toner Motor comes on.
Y N
I Press Clear. Set the meter to measure. Connect the meter between CNIOI-1 (+) and CN101-2 (-) on the Main PWB.
I Press Start. I There is approximately +22 VAC present.
Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. i
/ Go to Flag 1 and check for an open. If the wires are good, replace the Toner Motor / MOT4, PL 2.1.
Switch off the power. Connect the meter between, CN113-2 on the Main PWB (+) and chassis (-). Switch the power on. There is a steady +5 VDC present. Y N
1 Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
Perform the following: Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for an open circuit.
Check for a mechanical drive problem to the Toner Cartridge
Replace the Toner Cartridge, PL 8.2.
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
J1 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) Workcentre XD SERIES
MAlN PWB PL 7.1
TONER CARTRIDGE PL 8.2 +5 VDC
C = l B n a
ne
MAIN
MOT 4
TONER CARTRIDGE
PIJ9
REAR VIEW
loTEs: 0 THE TONER MOTOR IS ACTUATED WHEN LOWTONER CONCENTRATION IS SENSED BY THE LOWTONER SENSOR. IF THE MOTOR RUNS FOR 120 SECONDS AND THE LOW TONER SIGNAL IS STILL HIGH. THE TONER CARTRIDGE LAMP WILL FLASH.
Figure 1 J1 Status Code (Without SDF)
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
J1 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
41 Status Code RAP (With SDF) J 1, Indicates that the Toner Cartridge is empty
initial Actions Replace the Toner Cartridge. If a problem still exists, continue with the procedure
NOTE: I f the customer complains that the toner cartridge reached its end of life too soon, then instruct the customer that making copies with the document cover open or making copies with high image area coverage, such as photographs, will reduce the life of the toner cartridge.
Procedure Enter diagnostic code [lo]. The toner motor comes on. Y N
/ Press Clear. Set the meter to measure. Connect the meter between CN105-1 (+) and CN105-2 (-) on the Main PWB Press Start. There is approximately +22 VAG present. Y N
1 Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. I t
/ GO to Flag 1 and check for an open. If the wires are good, replace the Toner Motor / MOT4, PL 2.1.
Switch off the power. Connect the meter between, CN112-2 on the Main PWB (+) and chassis (-). Switch the power on. There is a steady +5 VDC present. Y N / Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. I Perform the following:
Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for an open circuit.
Check for a mechanical drive problem to the Toner Cartridge.
Replace the Toner Cartridge, PL 8.2.
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
J1 Status Code RAP (With SDF) Workcentre XD SERIES
Toner Dispense
MOT 4
MAIN PWB
TONER CARTRIDGE
PIJ9
REAR VIEW
NOTES: 0 THE TONER MOTOR IS ACTUATED WHEN LOW TONER CONCENTRATION IS SENSED BY THE LOWTONER SENSOR. IF THE MOTOR RUNS FOR 120 SECONDS AND THE LOWTONER SIGNAL IS STILL HIGH, THE TONER CARTRIDGE LAMP WILL FLASH.
Figure 1 J1 Status Code (With SDF)
WorkCentre XD SERIES
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
%"Itatus Code RAP (With SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
J2 Status Code RAP J2, indicates the Drum Cartridge has reached the end of its life
initial Actions Replace the Drum Cartridge with a new, not used, Drum Cartridge. If a problem still exists, con- tinue with the procedure.
Procedure There is less than 0.5 VDC measured between CN116-2 and GND on the Main PWB. Y N
/ Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the
/ Drum Cartridge Reset Switch, PL 5.1.
Actuate the Drum Cartridge Reset Switch. There is +5 VDC measured between CN116-2 and GND. Y N
/ Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the
/ Drum Cartridge Reset Switch, PL 5.1. I If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
CONTROL CONSOLE
Colitrol Console Harness
1 MAIN PLVB
+5 VDC
CM116 DRUNI 2 I
Figure 1 Drum Cartridge Reset circuit
S,~itch
Figure 2 Drum Cartridge Reset Switch
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
52 Status Code RAP
This page intentally left blank
Workcentre XD SERIES
STATUS lNDlCATOR RAPS
52 Status Code RAP
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
L1/L3 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) L1, indicates that the Main PWB sensed that the carriage did not leave home after power up or after start is pressed.
L3, indicates that the Main PWB sensed that the carriage did not return home after power up or after the copy cycle.
NOTE: Ensure that the shipping screw was removed at install.
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.
Procedure Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The lamp carriage is in or moves to the home position. Y N
/ Remove the right cover to gain access to the scan shaft. Manually rotate the scan shaft to
I position the carriage in the home position. Connect the meter to, CN122-2 and GND. I There is +5 VDC measured. Y N
j Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace 1 the Scan Home Sensor Q5, PL 3.2. i ! 1 Move the carriage off the home position. The meter reads LOW. J Y N 1 1 Replace the Scan Home Sensor 05, PL 3.2.
I I 1 Go to the next step. I There is 4-5 VDC measured between, CN122-2 on the Main PWB and GND. Y N
1 Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Scan Home Sensor Q5, PL 3.2.
Enter diagnostic code [I-I]. Press the Start button twice. The carriage moved. Y N I Connect the meter between, CN120-1 (+) on the Main PWB and GND (-).
1 There is +Z4 VDC measured. Y N I t j Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
Check the following for wear or damage, PL 3.1 : Scan Drive GearIPulley
Scan Drive Belt
Scan cables
The components are good.
v N / Replace the defective components, PL 3.1.
/ Go to Flag 1 and check the connection on CN120 on the Main PWB. If the connection is 1 good replace the Scan Drive Motor MOT2, PL 3.1.
A I Press the Clear button Remove the r~ght cover to gain access to the Scan Cable Dr~ve Shaft, PL3 1 Manually rotate the Scan Cable Drive Shaft to pos~t~on the carnage off the home position Enter d~agnostlc code [I-11 The Drum Cartridge lamp is off. Y N
Go to Flag 2 and check for an open clrcult If the wires are good, replace the Scan Home
j If the problem continues, replace the Maln PWB, PL 7 1
Check the following for wear or damage PL 3.1 : Ribbon Cable connection to CN120 on the Main PWB
Scan Drive GearIPulley
Scan Drive Belt
* Scan cables
The components are good. Y N I Repair and or replace the defective components PL 3.1, PL 3.2. I I If the problem still exists, replacing the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
.-s --
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
lbl/b3 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)
+5 VDC
'-Y
SCAN HOME
I +24 VDC
RIBBON
NOTE 0 STEP 0 THRU STEP 3 StGNALS ARE APPROXIMATELY 13 2 2 0 5VDC TO GND. WHEN MOTOR IS OPERATING
Scan Home Sensor Q5
Figure 1 Scan Drive Circuit
Workcentre XD SERIES
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
Ll/L3 Status Code RAP (Without SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
a blfL3 Status Code RAP (With SDF) press the Clear button. Remove the right cover to gain access to the Scan Cable Drive Shaft,
PL 3.1. ~ 1 , indicates that the ~ a i n PWB sensed that the carriage did not leave home after Power up Or Manually rotate the Scan Cable Drive Shaft to position the carriage off the home position. Enter after start is pressed. diagnostic code [I-I]. The Drum Cartridge lamp is off.
Y N L3, indicates that the Main PWB sensed that the carriage did not return home after power up or Go to Flag 2 and check for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Scan Home after the copy cycle. 1 Sensor 05. PL 3.2.
I If the problem continues, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. NOTE: Ensure that the shipping screw was removed at mstall.
I
Procedure Switch off the power. Switch on the power. The lamp carriage is in or moves to the home position. Y N
1 Remove the right cover to gain access to the scan shaft. Manually rotate the scan shaft to / position the carriage in the home position. Connect the meter to, CN125-2 and GND.
There is +5 VDC measured. N Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Scan Home Sensor Q5, PL 3.2.
i off the home position. The meter reads LOW.
the Scan Home Sensor Q5, PL 3.2. I I
Go to the next step.
There is +5 VDC measured between, CN125-2 on the Main PWB and GND. Y N
1 Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Scan Home Sensor Q5, PL 3.2.
I Enter dragnostic code [I-11. Press the Start button twice. The carriage moved. Y N
j Connect the meter between, CN122-1 (+) on the Main PWB and GND (-). There is +24 VDC measured.
Y N Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
Check the following for wear or damage, PL 3.1 : * Scan Drive GearIPulley
Scan Drive Belt
Scan cables
The components are good. Y N
/ Replace the defective components, PL 3.1. 1 I ' I Go to Flag 1 and check the connection on CN122 on the Main PWB. If the connection is
I good replace the Scan Drive Motor MOT2, PL 3.1.
Check the following for wear or damage PL 3.1 : Ribbon Cable connection to CN122 on the Main PWB
Scan Drive GearJPulley
* Scan Drive Belt
Scan cables
The Components are good. Y N
1 Repair and or replace the defective components PL 3.1, PL 3.2.
If the problem still exists, replacing the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
A STATUS INDICATOR RAPS 4/00 L1/L3 Status Code RAP (With SDF) 2-36 Workcentre XD SER~ES
Scan Home Sensor Q5
I I SCAN HOME I
RIBBON CABLE
Figure 1 LllL3 Status Code (With SDF)
4/00 STATUS INDICATOR RAPS Workcentre XD SERIES 2-37 L"B/L3 Status Code RAP (With SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
L4 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) The Main PWB sensed a Main Drive Motor MOT1 problem.
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.
initial Actions Clear any jams in the paper path and ensure that the Side Door is closed.
Procedure Enter diagnostic code [25-11. THe main motor comes on. Y N I Press the Clear button. Check the Ribbon Cable connection to CN114 on the Main
) PWB. The connection and the Ribbon Cable from the Main Drive Motor MOT3 are 1 good. I Y N
/ Repair or replace the Main Drive Ribbon Cable, PL 2.2. 1 1 i Switch off the power. The housing of the Main Drive Motor can be turned by hand. I Y N 1 1 Check for a mechanical problem such as binding or broken gears or a binding drum 1 i cartridge. Repair and or replace as necessary PL 2.2. 1 1
Switch on the power. Connect the meter from CN114 pin 1 and GND and pin 2 and GND on the Main PWB. There is +24 VDC present. Y N
1 Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
I Connect the meter to CN1 pin 1 and GND and pin 2 and GND on the Main Drive Motor There is +24 VDC present. Y N
I Replace the Main Drive Ribbon Cable, PL 2.2. j 1 Press Start. I The voltage decreases to approximately 10 to 14 VDC.
1 Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
If the problem still exists, replace the Main Drive Motor MOT1, PL 2.2. If the problem continues, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
Check for a mechanical problem such as binding or broken gears or a binding drum cartridge Repairlreplace as necessary, PL 2.2. If the problem still exists, replace the Main Drive Motor MOT1, PL 2.2
n w - 0
Figure 1 Main PWB
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
L4 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) Workcentre XD SERIES
L4 Status Code RAP (With SDF) The Main PWB sensed a Main Drive Motor MOTl problem.
initial Actions Clear any jams in the paper path and ensure that the Side Door IS closed.
Procedure Enter diagnostic code [25-I]. The main motor comes on. Y N
Press the Clear button. Check the Ribbon Cable connection to CN113 on the Main PWB. The connection and the Ribbon Cable from the Main Drive Motor MOTl are good. V N
/ Repair or replace the Main Drive Ribbon Cable, PL 2.2.
Sw~tch off the power The housing of the Main Drive Motor can be turned by hand. Y N
Check for a mechanical problem such as binding or broken gears or a bindlng drum 1 1 carfr~dge Repair and or replace as necessary PL 2.2 I I I Switch on the power. Connect the meter from CN113 pin 1 and GND and pin 2 and GND I on the Main PWB. There is +24 VDC present.
j j Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. j I
Connect the meter to CN1 pin 1 and GND and pin 2 and GND on the Main Drive Motor. There is +24 VDC present. Y N
I Replace the Main Drive Ribbon Cable, PL 2.2.
I Press Start. The voltage decreases to approximately 10 to 14 VDC. V N
; Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. I I 1 If the problem still exlsts, replace the Main Drive Motor MOTl, PL 2 2
I If the problem continues, replace the Maln PWB, PL 7 1
Check for a mechanical problem such as bindlng or broken gears or a blnding drum cartr~dge Repalrlreplace as necessary, PL 2.2. If the problem stdl exists, replace the Ma~n Drlve Motor MOT1, PL 2 2
CNl I
Figure 1 Main PWB (With SDF)
In Drive Motor v MOTI
Workcentre XD SERIES
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
L4 Status Code RAP (With SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
b6 Status Code RAP (Without SDF) The Main PWB sensed a Polygon motor lock signal error.
NOTE: I f the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.
Procedure Enter diagnostic code [25-101. The Polygon Motor comes on for 30 seconds. V N I Check the connector CN115 on the Main PWB and the wires and connectors on the
1 Laser Module. The connections and wires are good. J Y N I 1 Replace the Laser Harness, PL 3.3. I
1 i t h e problem still exists, replace the Laser Module, PL 3.3.
j If the problem continues, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
Switch the power off. Switch the power on. If the problem still exists, replace the Laser Module, PL 3.3.
Figure 1 Main PWB
b6 Status Code RAP (With SDF) The Main PWB sensed a Polygon motor lock signal error.
Procedure Enter d~agnost~c code 125-101 The Polygon Motor comes on for 30 seconds. V N
I Check the connector CN119 on the Maln PWB and the wrres and connectors on the 1 Laser Module. The connections and wires are good. / V N I / Replace the Laser Harness, PL 3 3
I I If the problem still exists, replace the Laser Module, PL 3.3.
1 If the problem continues, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
Switch the power off. Switch the power on. If the problem still exists, replace the Laser Module, PL 3.3.
Figure 1 Main PWB (With SDF)
STATUS lNDlCATOR RAPS 4/00 L6 Status Code RAP, L6 Status Code RAP (With SBF) 2-40 WorkCentre XD SERIES
This page intentionally left blank
4/00 STATUS INDICATOR RAPS Workcentre XD SERIES 2-41 L6 Status Code RAP, L6 Status Code RAP (With
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
P Status Code RAP (Without SDF) Y N I Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1
The Main PWB sensed that the selected Paper Tray is out of paper or a misfeed has occurred. 1 Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Paper
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the Feed Solenoid SOL1 PL 2,2, correct Main PWB connector numbers.
initial Actions Ensure pressure plate lock is removed from the paper tray.
Ensure the side and rear paper guides are installed and that they are not too tight against the paper.
Procedure Enter the diagnostic code [30-I]. Manually actuate and deactuate the Paper Feed Sensor Q1 while observing the Toner Car- tridge lamp. The Toner Cartridge lamp turns on and off. Y N
I Perform the following: Check the sensor actuator for proper operation PL 5.1.
1 Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. I If the checks are good, replace the Paper Feed Sensor Q1, PL 5.1.
The P status code occurs when the Main Tray is selected. Y N
I The machine has a Multi Sheet Bypass Tray. I Y N 1 Enter the diagnostic code [30-I]. Place a sheet of paper into the Single Sheet 1 Bypass tray and remove the sheet. The Auto Exposure LED comes on and goes
i Check for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding. If the prob-
I 1 lem still exists, Go to Flag 4 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires
1 are good replace the Single Sheet Bypass Feed Sensor Q2, PL 5.2.
Check for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding.
1 Enter the diagnostic code 6-1. Connect the meter between, CN111-2 (+) on the Main PWB and ground (-). Press the Start button. The meter alternates between +24 VDC and GND.
1 Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
1 Check for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding.
1 If the problem still exists, go to Flag 3 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Multi Bypass Feed Solenoid SOL4, PL 5.5. 1 Replace the Main PWB. PL 71 .
Enter the diagnostic code [6-I]. Connect the meter between CN102-2 (+) on the Main PWB and ground (-). Press the Start button. The meter alternates between +24 VDC and GND.
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
P Status Code RAP (Without SDF)
MAIN PWB
l-TL--? PL +5VDC SOLENOID SOL 1 PL 2.2
I I +5 VDC r1
+24 VDC
PNK I I
NOTES A PAPER JAM WILL OCCUR (PAPER JAM LAMP FLASHING) I F 0 A THE PAPER FEED SENSOR IS ACTUATED AT POWER ON B. THE PAPER FEED SENSOR DOES NOT DEACTUATE IN TIME
A FLASHING " P STATUS CODE WILL BE DISPLAYED IF THE PAPER (2a FEED SENSOR Q1 IS NOT ACTUATED IN TIME AFTER START IS
+5 VDC
C N l l l
I +5 VDC C N l l l
D FEED SOLENOID Multi Bypass Tray
Multi Bypass Feed Solenoid SOL4
U PRESSED
Figure 1 P Code (Without SDF)
+24 VDC I
Paper Feed Sensor Q l
Workcentre XD SERIES
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
P Status Code RAP (Without SBF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
P Status Code RAP (With SDF) The Main PWB sensed that the selected Paper Tray is out of paper or a misfeed has occurred.
Initial Actions Ensure pressure plate lock is removed from the paper tray.
Ensure the side and rear paper guides are installed and that they are not too tight against the paper.
Procedure Enter the diagnostic code 130-11. Manually actuate and deactuate the Paper Feed Sensor Q1 while observing the Toner Car- tridge lamp. The Toner Cartridge LED comes on and goes off. Y N
/ Perform the following: 1 * Check the sensor actuator for proper operation PL 5.1.
1 Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. I I If the checks are good, replace the Paper Feed Sensor Q1, PL 5.1.
Manually actuate and deactuate the Tray 2 feed Sensor Q7 while observing the Toner Car- tridge lamp. The Toner cartridge LED comes on and goes off. Y N
/ Perform the following: Check the sensor actuator for proper operation, PL 5.8.
Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for an open circuit.
If the checks are good, replace the Tray 2 Paper Feed Sensor Q7, PL 5.8.
The P status code occurs when using the Main Tray. Y N
The P status code occurs when using Tray 2. Y N
1 1 The P status code occurs when using the Multlsheet bypass Tray. Y N
code [3Cl]. Place a sheet of paper into the Single Sheet tray and remove the sheet. The Auto Exposure LED comes on and
goes off.
for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding. If the problem still exists, Go to Flag 6 and check the wires for an open circuit. If
replace the Single Sheet Bypass Sensor Q2, PL 5.2.
Check for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding.
1 inter the diagnostic Code 16-11 and select Multi Bypass Tray. Press the Start but- ton. The Multi Bypass Feed Solenoid SOL4, engages and disengages several times.
I I Y N Check for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding. If the prob- 1 1 lem s t exists, go to Flag 5 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Multi Bypass Solenoid SOL 4, PL 5.5.
I
I 1 check for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding, PL 5.5.
Enter the d~agnostic Code 16-11 and select Tray 2 Press the Start button The Tray 2 Feed Solenoid SOL2, engages and disengages several times. Y N I Go to Flag 4 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace
1 the Tray 2 Soenold SOL 2, PL 5.8.
I
/ Check for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding, PL 5.8. I Enter the diagnost~c Code [6-I] and select the Ma~n Tray Press the Start button The Paper feed Solenoid SOLI, engages and disengages several times. Y N
/ Check for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding If the problem still / exists, go to Flag 3 and check the wires for an open c~rcuit If the wires are good, replace 1 the Paper Feed Solenold SOL 1, PL 2.2
I Check for a mechanical problem preventing the paper from feeding, PL 2.2.
MAIN PWB I l o ,WITHSDF n I< ONLY) l..--A C N l l l
CNl lO !
CN lO l
CNIO$
Figure 1 Main PWB
*. - STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
P Status Code RAP (With SDF) Workcentre XD SERIES
S Mulii Bypass Feed 2
Solenoid SOL4
Sensor Q1 Tray 2 Feed Sensor Q7
Figure 2 P Code (With SDF)
NOTES:
A PAPER JAM WILL OCCUR (PAPER JAM LAMP FLASHING) IF 0 A THE PAPER FEED SENSOR IS ACTUATED AT POWER ON B THE PAPER FEED SENSOR DOES NOT DEACTUATE IN TlMlE
@ A FLASHING "V STATUS CODE WILL BE .SPLAYED IF THE PAPER FEED SENSOR 0 1 IS NOT ACTUATED IN TIME AFTER START IS PRESSED
TRAY 2 FEED SOLENOID SOL 2 i
olenoid
Workcentre XD SERIES
STATUS lNDlCATOR RAPS
P Status Code RAP (With SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
L12-[01] / U2-[04] Status Code RAP U2-[02] indicates that the Main PWB sensed a memory failure
U2-1041 indicates a that the Main PWB sensed an access error.
Procedure Perform the U2 Status Code Clear Procedure: * Enter the diagnostic code [16].
Press the Start button.
If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1
Drum Cartridge LED On RAP The Drum Cartridge Lamp on steady indicates that the Drum Cartridge is near end of life.
Procedure If the Drum Cartridge LED is still on or flashing after changing the Cartridge, go to the, J2 Sta- tus Code RAP.
--
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS 4/00 U2-[01] / U2-1041 Status Code RAP, Drum Cartridge 2-46 Workcentre XD SERIES
Toner Cartridge LED On RAP Indicates that a low toner condition exists.
rnitial Actions
MOTE: If the customer compla~ns that the toner cartrldge reached ~ t s end of 11fe too soon, then ~nstruct the customer that maklng cop~es wlth the document cover open or mak~ng coples w~th hlgh ~mage area coverage, such as photographs, w11l reduce the 11fe of the toner cartrldge
Procedure Replace the Toner Cartr~dge, PL 8.2. If the problem stdl exlsts, go to the, J1 Status Code RAP (W~thout SDF) or the J1 Status Code RAP (W~th SDF).
Workcentre XD SERIES
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
Toner Cartridge LED On RAP
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
1.1 Power OM RAP (Without SDF) Initial Actions
NOTE: I f the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.
Ensure that input power is measured at the machine power cord.
Procedure Switch off the power. While observ~ng the Exposure Lamp Assembly, switch on the power. The Exposure Lamp Assembly moves. Y N j The Control Console is blank. I Y N ' 1 Go to the 2.1 Selectionilndication RAP (Without SDF). I I I -
There is +5 VDC measured from GN109 pin 21 and pin 22 to GND on the Main PWB. Y N
1 ACH is measured between CN2 and CN5 on the Power Supply PWB. Y N I
Go to Flag 1 and check for an open circuit. I / Switch off the power. Disconnect the power. Check Fuses F1 and F3 on the Power Supply PWB for an open circuit. The Fuses are good. Y N
1 Replace the defective Fuse, PL 7.1. Switch on the power. The problem is I resolved. I Y N 1 Replace the Power Supply PWB, PL 7.1 I I
Make several copies to ensure the problem is resolved
1 Replace the Power Supply PWB, PL 7.1. I
1 here is +24 VDC measured from CN109 pins 7 and pin 8 to GND, on the Main OWB. Y N 1 j Go to the 1.2 DC Power RAP (Without SDF). I I
I GO to the 2.2 Selection RAP (Without SDF).
I Go to the 1.2 DC Power RAP (Without SDF).
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
1 .I Power ON RAP (Without SDF) Workcentre XD SERIES
Fuser Power On
= 1 15 VAC (60HZ) = 2201240 VAC (50HZ)
F1 F3
Figure 1 1.1 Power On (Without SDF)
Workcentre XD SERIES
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
1 .I Power ON RAP (Without SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
1.1 Power On RAP (With SDF) Initial Actions Ensure that input power is measured at the machine power cord.
Procedure Switch off the power. While observing the Exposure Lamp Assembly, switch on the power. The Exposure Lamp Assembly moves. Y N
I The Control Console is blank.
I Y N
j Go to the 2.1 Selection/lndication RAP (with SDF).
! There is +5 VDC measured from CNlOl pin 21 and pin 22 to GNB on the Main 1 PWB.
J Y N
/ ACH is measured between CN2 and CN5 on the Power Supply PWB. / l Y N
1 Go to Flag 1 and check for an open circuit.
i Switch off the power. Disconnect the power. Check Fuses F1 and F3 on the Power Supply PWB for an open circuit. The Fuses are good. V N
/ Replace the defective Fuse, PL 7.1. Switch on the power. The problem is / resolved. I Y N I Replace the Power Supply PWB, PL 7.1. I I
i Make several copies to ensure the problem is resolved.
j i I Replace the Power Supply PWB, PL 7.1 I I I h e r e is +24 VDC measured from CNlOl pins 7 and pin 8 to GND, on the Main 1 PWB. / Y N 1 Go to the 1.2 DC Power (With SDF). i 1 b o to the 2.2 Selection RAP (With SDF)
I Go to the 1.2 DC Power (With SDF).
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
1 -1 Power On RAP (With SDF)
Fuser Power On
= 1 15 VAC (60HZ) = 220/240 VAC (50HZ)
Figure 1 1.1 Power On (With SDF)
MAIN PWB
/ CNlOl
WorkCentre XD SERIES
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
1 .1 Power On RAP (With SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
1.2 DC Power RAP (Without SDF) NOTE: Enter this RAP from the 1.1 Power ON RAP (Without SDF) only
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main P WB connector numbers.
Procedure There is +24 VDC measured between CN109-7 and GND. V N
I Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open circuit. I There is +I 2 VDC measured between CN109-19 and GND. V N I Go to Flag 2. Check the wires for an open circuit. I There is +3.3 VDC measured between CN109-20 and GND. V N
1 Go to Flag 3. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Power 1 Supply PWB PSI, PL 7.1.
There is +5 VDC measured between CN109-21 and GND. Y N
/ Go to Flag 4. Check the wires for an open circuit. I If the problem still exists, refer to BSD, 1.2 Power Generation and Distribution (Section 7) for further DC power distribution checks. Check for an intermittent or loose connection. If the prob- lem continues, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
1.2 DG Power RAP (Without SDF) Workcentre XB SERIES
MAIN PWB I P L 7 1 C N l l 4
[Notes +24 VDC i 1 VDC +5.0 \fDC + .2 VDC
Figure 1 1.2 DC Power (Without SDF)
CNI,
I +5VDC Interlock SVJ I +5 VDC
+5V1 (DSWS)
ORN
WorkCentre XD SERIES
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
1.2 DC Power RAP (Without SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
1.2 DC Power (With SDF) NOTE: Enter this RAP from the 1.1 Power On RAP (With SDF) only
Procedure There is +24 VDC measured between CN101-7 and GND. Y N
Go to Flag 1. Check the wires for an open circuit.
There is +12 VDC measured between CN101-19 and GRID. Y N
1 GO to Flag 2. Check the wires for an open circuit.
I There is 4-3.3 VDC measured between CN101-20 and GND. Y N
Go to Flag 3. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Power 1 Supply PWB PSI. PL 7.1. I i There is +5 VDC measured between CN101-21 and GND. Y N
I Go to Flag 4. Check the wires for an open circuit. I I If the problem still exists, refer to BSD, 1.2 Power Generation and Distribution (Section 7) for further DC power distribution checks. Check for an intermittent or loose connection. If the prob- lem continues, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
1.2 DC Power (With SDF) Workcentre XB SERIES
POWER SUPPLY PWB PSI P L 7 1 CN103 +24VDC INTLK
GENERATION
CN124 6
Notes Q +24 VDC * 1 VDC +5 0 VDC * 2 VDC
CN116 I L Figure 1 1.2 DC Power (With SDF)
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
1.2 DG Power (With SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
2.1 Selectionnndication RAP (Without SDF) Procedure
NOTE: I f the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main P WB connector numbers.
Enter diagnostic code [ 5-11 to test the control console lamps. Diagnostic code 15-11 can be entered. Y N
j Go to 2.2 Selection RAP (Without SDF).
Press Start several times to test the control console display and lamps. All the LEDs come on for 5 seconds each time the Start button is pressed. Y N
1 The Ready lamp lights. I I Y N
1 Go to the 2.2 Selection RAP (Without SDF).
Go to Flag 1. Check CN801 on the Control Console PWB and CN116 on the Main PWB for being properly connected to the Control Console Ribbon Cable. If defective, replace the Control Console Ribbon Cable, PL 6.3. If good, replace the Control Console PWB, PL 1.3. If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
For all selection problems, go to the 2.2 Selection RAP (Without SDF).
MAIN PWB
Figure 1 Main PWB (Without SDF)
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS 4/00 2.1 Selection/lndication RAP (Without SDF) 2-56 Workcentre XD SERIES
Control Console PWB PL 1 3
Figure 2 2.1 Selectionllndicator (Without SDF)
4/00 STATUS INDICATOR RAPS Workcentre XD SERIES 2-57 2.1 Selection/lndication RAP (Without SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
2."1eleetion/lndiication RAP (with SBF) Procedure Enter diagnostic code [ 5-11 to test the control console lamps. Diagnostic code [5-11 can be entered.
Y N
/ Go to 2.2 Selection RAP (With SDF).
Press Start several times to test the control console display and lamps. All the LEDs come on for 5 seconds each time the Start button is pressed. Y N
i The Ready lamp lights. j I i Y N ! Go to the 2.2 Selection RAP (With SDF). j I ! Go to Flag 1. Check CN801 on the Control Console PWB and CN116 on the Main PWB
I for being properly connected to the Control Console Ribbon Cable. If defective, replace 1 the Control Console Ribbon Cable, PL 6.3. If good, replace the Control Console PWB, j PL 1.3.
I If the problem still exists, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
For all selection problems, go to the 2.2 Selection RAP (With SDF)
(WITH SDF ONLY)
C = l B U
Figure 1 Main PWB (With SDF)
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
2.1 Selectionnndication RAP (with SDF) Workcentre XD SERIES
Exposure Fl
Tray 2 0
Figure 2 2.4 Selectionllndication (With SDF)
Workcentre XD SERIES
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
2.1 Seleelion/indIication RAP (with SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
2.2 Selection RAP (Without SDF) Procedure
NOTE: I f the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main PWB connector numbers.
Switch power off, then on. The Ready lamp comes on or is flashing. Y N
Go to Flag 1. Check connectors and the Ribbon Cable for an open circuit. Replace the 1 Control Console Ribbon Cable. PL 6.3 if required.
Press Start button. The print cycle starts. Y N
/ Replace the Control Console PWB, PL 1.3
If a problem still exists, replace the Control Console PWB, PL 1.3 If the problem continues, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
MAIN PWB (WITH SDF
ONLY)
O B U
Figure 1 Main PWB (Without SDF)
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
2.2 Selection RAP (Without SDF)
Control Console PWB PL 1 3
Selection Control
Figure 2 2.2 Selection (Without SDF)
4/00 STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
Workcentre XD SERIES 2-61 2.2 Sele~tion RAP (Without S%)F)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
2.2 Selection RAP (With SDF) Procedure Switch power off, then on. The Ready lamp comes on or is flashing. Y N
1 Go to Flag 1. Check connectors and the Ribbon Cable for an open circuit. Replace the ! Control Console Ribbon Cable, PL 6.3 if required. I I Press Start button. The print cycle starts. Y N
/ Replace the Control Console PWB, PL 1.3. I I
If a problem still exists, replace the Control Console PWB, PL 1.3. If the problem continues, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
(WITH SDF ONLY)
0 I n a I n
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
2.2 Selection RAP (With SDF) Workcentre XD SERIES
Selection Control
Figure 1 2.2 Selection (With SDF)
Workcentre XD SERIES
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
2.2 Selection RAP (With SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
4.1 Ventilation Fan Motor RAP (Without SDF) Procedure
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main P WB connector numbers.
Switch off the power. Switch on the power. There is +24 VDC measured between CN119-1 on the Main PWB and GND. Y N I
Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1.
The Ventilation Fan is operating at full speed. V N ! Replace the Ventilation Fan MOT3, PL 2.1. I Allow the machine to go into Power Saver Mode. The fan is operating at low speed. Y N
1 There is approximately +23 VDC measured between CN119-2 on the Main PWB j and GND. J Y N 1 1 Replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. \
1 keplace the Ventilation Fan MOT3. PL 2.1.
The Ventilation Fan will switch off once the machine enters the Auto Shut-off Mode. If the fan continues to operate, replace the Ventilation Fan MOT3, PL 2.1.
Figure 1 Ventilation Fan MOT3
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
4.1 Ventilation Fan Motor RAP (Without SDF) Workcentre XD SERIES
4.1 Ventilation Fan Motor RAP (With SDF) Procedure Switch off the power. Switch on the power. There is +24 VDC measured between CN120-1 on the Main PWB and GND. Y N
/ Replace the Maln PWB, PL 7.1.
The Ventilation Fan is operating at full speed. Y N
I I
Replace the Ventllat~on Fan MOT3, PL 2 1.
I Allow the machine to go Into Power Saver Mode. The fan is operating at low speed. Y M 1 There is approximately +23 VDC measured between CN120-2 on the Main PWB I and GND. / Y N I 1 Replace the Maln PWB, PL 7.1. , I i kep~ace the Ventilation Fan MOT3, PL 2.1. ! The Ventilation Fan will switch off once the machine enters the Auto Shut-off Mode. If the fan continues to operate, replace the Ventilation Fan MOT3, PL 2.1.
Figure 2 Ventilation Fan MOT3
Figure 1 Main PWB (With SDF)
4/00 STATUS INDICATOR RAPS Workcentre XD SERIES 2-65 4.1 Ventilation Fan Motor RAP (With SDF)
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
5.1 SDF JAM LED RAP initial Actions
NOTE: If the Main PWB has a large notch on the left side, refer to the (With SDF) RAP for the correct Main P WB connector numbers.
If the Auto Start SDF mode is desired, refer to the" Programmable Settings" procedure in (Sec- tion 6).
Switch off the Power and clear any document jams. Remove any documents form the SDF
Procedure Switch on the power. Enter the diagnostic code [2-21. Place a sheet of paper in the SDF Doc- ument Tray. The Toner Cartridge LED comes on. Y N
1 Go to Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, check the Set 1 Detect Actuator, PL 9.2 for wear or damage.
1 If the problem still exists, replace the SDF Sensor PWB, PL 9.2.
I Open and then close the SDF Feed Assembly. The SDF Jam LED comes on and goes off. Y N I Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the / SDF Sensor PWB, PL 9.2. I i Exit the Diagnostic Mode. Remove paper from the SDF Document Tray. With the machine in the Ready condition insert a sheet of paper into the SDF Document Tray. The SDF Selected LED comes on. Y N
1 The SDF Jam LED comes on or is flashing. I Y N
1 Check the Set Defector Actuator, for wear or damage PL 9.2. ! I The SDF Jam LED is flashing. Y N 1 Go to Flag 3 and check the wires for an open or short circuit.
If the wires are good, check that the Document Cover Closed Sensor Q9 is posi- tioned correctly. 1 If the problem still exists, replace the SDF Sensor PWB PL 9.2.
I
I Perform the following: i Check the SDF Document Path Sensor Q3 for damage and ensure that it is
mounted correctly, PL 9.3, PL 9.4.
1 Go to Flag 4 and check the wires for an short circuit. If the problem continues,
I replace the SDF Document Path Sensor 03, PL 9.3, PL 9.4.
i If the problem still exists, go to the AlIA2 Status Code RAP.
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS 4/00 5.1 SDF JAM LED RAP 2-66 Workcentre XD SERIES
MIAIN PWB
P L 7 1 +BVDC
(WITH S D F ONLY)
SENSOR 0 9 Document cover closed 12-21 (L) +5 VDC
BRN 1 2 VDC 7
A I "U UU,",
GRY
SDF DOCUMENT PATH SENSOR Q3 Docunie~it cover closed
[z-21 i L I +5 VDC
I I BRN 1 2 VDC
-- v-,
GRY T
+5 VDC
3'
Figure 1 5.j SDF Start Circuit
Document Co'ier Closed Sensor 0 9
SDF Sensor
SDF Documelit Path Selisoe Q3
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
5.1 SDF JAM LED RAP
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
8.1 Paper Tray Ready RAP initial Actions Ensure that the Main Paper Tray and Paper Tray 2 if applicable are closed.
Procedure With the machine in a ready state, select the Main Paper Tray. The Main Tray LED is on and not flashing. Y N
1 Go to Flag I and check the wires for a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Tray
/ Detect Switch S2, PL 5.1.
Open the Main Tray. The Main Tray LED is flashing. Y N
I Go the Flag 1 and check the wires for an open circuit. It the wires are good, replace the
1 Tray Detect Switch S2, PL 5.1.
If applicable select Tray 2. The Tray 2 LED is on and not flashing. Y N
1 Go to Flag 2 and check the wires for a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Tray
/ 2 Detect Switch S5, PL 5.8.
Open Tray 2. The Tray 2 LED is flashing. Y N
Go the Flag 2 and check the wires for an open circuit. It the wires are good, replace the 1 Tray 2 Detect Switch S5, PL 5.8. I l ithe problem still exists, replace the Main PWB, PL 7.1. This page intentionally left blank
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
8.1 Paper Tray Ready RAP
NOTES CONNECTOR NUhilBERS IN PARENTHESIS ARE FOR IvlACHlNES EQUIPED WITH AN SDF.
@ TRAY LED, WILL FLASH WHEN THE TRAY IS SiLCf3ED AND OPEN.
Figure 1 Paper Tray Ready
4/00 STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
Workcentre XD SERIES 2-69 8.1 Paper Tray Ready RAP
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
This page intentionally left blank
STATUS INDICATOR RAPS
8.1 Paper Tray Ready RAP
3 lmage Quality CQ1 Copy Defect Entry RAP ......................................................................................... Definitions ....................................................................................................................... Image Quality Diagnostics ............................................................................................. Image Quality Specification ............................................................................................ CQ 2 Background (Bands) RAP ...................................................................................... CQ 3 Background (Uniform) RAP ................................................................................... CQ 4 Banding RAP .........................................................................................................
.................................... ................................... CQ5 Black Copy RAP (Simplex Mode) .... CQ6 Black Copy RAP (Duplex Mode) ............................................................................. CQ 7 Blank Copy RAP .................................................................................................... CQ 8 Blurred Image RAP ................................................................................................ CQ 9 Deletions (LE to TE) RAP ....................................................................................
...................... ...................................................................... CQ 10 Light Copy RAP .. CQ 11 Lines and Streaks RAP .................................. ... ................................................... CQ 12 Misregistration RAP ............................................................................................. CQ 13 Residual Image RAP ................... .. ................................................................... CQ 14 Skew RAP ................................. ... ........................................................................ CQ 15 SkipsISmears RAP .............................................................................................. CQ 16 Spots RAP .......................................................................................................... CQ 17 Uneven Density RAP ...........................................................................................
............................................................................................. CQ 18 Unfused Copy RAP ........................................................................................................ CQ 19 Wrinkle RAP
CQ 20 Distortion RAP ............................ .. ..................................................................... CQ 21 Magnification RAP .............................................................................................. CQ 22 Image Displacement RAP ..................................................................................
Workcentre XD SERIES
lmage Quality
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
image Quality
Workcentre XD SERIES
CQ1 Copy Defect Entry RAP Definitions Copy qual~ty refers to the entrre copy Defects can occur anywhere on the copy These defects The following terms are commonly used to descrlbe copy quallty problems may be damaged paper or Image quallty defects.
Background el1m1nate problems cause the damaged paper before attempting to fix the Image (CQ 2 Background (Bands) RAP or CQ 3 Background (Uniform) RAP) Background occurs as
quallty problems The damaged paper could cause the Image quality problems darkness or drrttness on the non-tmage areas of the copy
Procedure Compare the lmage defect to the Delinrl~ons After you determrne whlch deflnrtlon best describes the defect, go to the corresponding RAP The chart whlch IS provided wrth each RAP lrsts the Posslble Causes and Corrective Actlons
The Possible Causes are arranged in order from the most to the least likely cause or the ease of the check. Corrective Action(s) are given for each cause. Read all of the possible causes before taking any corrective action.
1. Start w~th the flrst poss~ble cause and contlnue through the list untrl you come to the cause that best appl~es to the lmage defect
2 Perform the corrective action.
3. When he defect is corrected, go to the Copier Maintenance procedures in the Service Call Procedures in Section 1. If the defect is still present, continue with the other Possible Causes.
Banding (CQ 4 Banding RAP) Banding is a condition marked by narrow, alternating dark and light bands that run across the copy, that is, in the main scanning direction.
Black Copy (GO5 Black Copy RAP (Simplex Mode) or CQS Black Copy RAP (Duplex Mode)) A copy that is totally black with no image.
Blank copy (CQ 7 Blank Copy RAP) A copy entirely without an image.
Deletions (CQ 9 Deletions (LE to TEJ RAP) An area of the image where information has been lost. The deletions could be localized or bands from top to bottom or side to side.
Density (CQ 10 Light Copy RAP) or ( CQ 17 Uneven Density RAP) The relative blackness between the image and non-image areas.
Fuser Fix (CQ 18 Unfused Copy RAP) A measure of how well the toner particles adhere to the paper as a result of the fusing process.
lmage Displacement (CQ 22 Image Displacement RAP) Part of the image information is placed elsewhere on the copy or it is completely missing. The area of the missing information is sharply defined. This is unlike deletions where the image is not sharply defined or clear.
image Distortion (CQ 20 Distortion RAP) Distortion of the image from one side of the copy to the other. The image from side to side or lead edge to trail edge is not parallel to the edges of the copy. This defect may result from a problem with the alignment of the optics components.
Light lmage (CQ 10 Light Copy RAP)Copies where the density is lighter than the specified density of the copier.
Line Darkness Darkness and uniformity of a line.
Workcentre XD SERIES
lmage Quality
CQ1 Copy Defect Entry RAP, Definitions
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Magnification Unfused copy (CQ 21 Magnification RAP) (CQ "r Unfused Copy RAP) A copy on which the image can be easily wiped off the paper. The
image has not adhered to the paper.
Misregistration (CQ 12 Misregistration RAP) The distance from the lead edge of the image to the lead edge of the paper is not within specification. (CQ 19 Wrinkle RAP) The paper has very thin creases.
Offsetting Transfer of toner from the copy to the Fuser Assembly Heat Roll. Sometimes the toner is trans- ferred back to the copy or consecutive copies.
Paper Damage Any physical distortion to the copy paper, including folds, nicks, wrinkles, etc.
Paper Handling The process of transporting the paper from the supply area through the xerographic and fusing subsystems.
Resolution (CQ 8 Blurred image RAP) The uniformity or clarity of fine line detail.
Residual image (CQ -13 Residual Image RAP) An image that is repeated onto the same copy or consecutive copies. The image can be either a ghosting or the original image or a toner image. This prob- lem can be caused by poor cleaning of the photoreceptor, a photoreceptor that is worn, a developer roll that is worn, poor cleaning of the fuser.
Skew (CQ 14 Skew RAP) The image is skewed on the paper. The image from side to side or lead edge to trail edge is not parallel to the edges of the copy. This defect may result from misad- justed, contaminated, or worn paper transportation system components.
Smear (CQ 15 SkipsiSmears) Any image defect that occurs in the direction that is perpendicular to paper feed.
Spots (CQ 16 Spots RAP) Defects that are 0.2 inches (5 mrn) or smaller in diameter.
Streaks (GQ 'i 1 Lines and Streaks RAP) Any image defect that occurs in the direction of paper feed.
Uneven Density (CQ 17 Uneven Density RAP) The image darkness varies across the copy.
Image Quality 4/00
Definitions 3-4 Workcentre XD SERIES
Image Quality Diagnostics Image Quality Specification It is important to understand the orientation of copies in order to troubleshoot image quality Test Patterns 8213524 (NASG and XcL) and 8213523 (XE) problems. Refer to Figure I. The following terms will be used when referring to copies made The primary test used on this product is the 82P524 (NASG and XCL) or the 82P523 on the machine. (XE). This test pattern is the Multinational Standard Test Pattern used for the evaluation of the
image quality. Side A and Side B are used to evaluate the image quality against different image quality specifications.
IMAGE SIDE UP
TRAIL EDGE
< > (HORIZONTAL)
Figure 1 Copy Orientation Terms
Determining the dlstance between defects may help rsolate problems to a spec~flc component Defects that are 3 1 Inches (79 mm) apart (lead edge of the defect to lead the edge of the next defect) rn the paper feed dlrect~on could be caused by the photoreceptor The clrcumference of the photoreceptor IS 3.1 rnches (79 mm)
Defects that are 3.7 Inches (94 mm) apart (lead edge of defect to lead edge of next defect) in the paper feed drrectron could be caused by the Fuser Heat Roll. The clrcumference of the fuser heat roll IS 3.7 Inches (94 mm).
Defects that are 2 5 ~nches (64 mm) apart (lead edge of defect to lead edge of next defect) In the paper feed dlrectlon could be caused by the Magnetlc Roll. The clrcumference of the Mag- netlc Roll IS 2.5 Inches (64 mm).
Make four copies of each side of this test pattern in Text mode.
Evaluate the Side A copies against the specifications provided in Table 1.
Evaluate the Side B copies against the specifications provided in Table 2.
Test Pattern 82E12130 Use Test Pattern 82E12130 to evaluate Set Document Feeder copy quality problems (skew, misregistration). If the test pattern is not available, position Test Pattern 82P524 (NASG) or 82P523 (XE) on the Document Glass and make an 8-112" x 1 4 (216 x 356 mm) copy. Ensure that the two outside 10 mm reference targets are the identical distance from the edge of the sheet. Use the copy to evaluate SDF copy quality.
4/00 lmage Quality
3-5 image Quality Diagnostics, image Quality Specifi-
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
LEAD EDGE
Wn tonudc k y m fo h t a e n & , h e t e s lyml ursp cvol rege Wuodl ouy 1 yrou tkem I I daer "do eoyvru aha genb e d l s l tmei nad f 9 f s z t Tlha e t s t a p t e t n r ; a utmep e n e r j l e p aer nelcsHde
-.
Wn tonudc kynm fa h t a e r v b , h e t e s lyml u r s p cvolrege Wuodl ouy 1 J ~ O U t lem I I daer "do eoyvru ahs genb e d l s l
- tmel nad f 9 f s z t Tlhz e t s t a p t e t n r ; a. utmep e n e r j l e p aer nelosHde
1 2
Wn tonudc kynm fo h t a e r v 6 , hetea lyml ursp ovolrege Wuadl ouy 1 yrau tlem I I d a e r nda eoyvru ahs genb e d i s l tmez nad f 9 f s z t . Tlhz e t s t a p t e t n r ; a utmep e n e r j l e p aer nelosHde
7 ,
SIDE B
Wn tonudo lynm Eo h t a ervC, h e t e s lyml ursp cvol rege Wuodi ouy 1 yrou t lem I i daer ndo eayvru ahs genb e d i s i tmel nad f 9 f s z t Tihz 1 e t s t a p t e t n r ; a utmep e n e r j l e p a e r nelosHde
VJn zroudo By- f o h ta e m & , h e t e s iyml u r s p cvol rege . Viuodl ouy 1 yrou t lem I I d a e r ndo eoyvrli ahs genb e d l s l tmei nad f 9 f s z t . Txhv e t s t a p t e t n r ; a utmep e n e r j l e p a e r nelosnde
$ 0
Wn tonudc Aynm f a h t a e r v e , h e t e s lyml ursp ovo1reee. Wuadl ouv 1 yrou tlem I I daer ndo eoyvm ahs genb e d ~ s l tmel nad f g f s z t . Tihz , e t s t a p t e t n r ; a utmep e n e r j l e p aer nelcsHde
10
Figure 1 Test Pattern 82P524 (Side A) Figure 2 Test Pattern 8213524 (Side B)
lmage Quality
lmage Quality Specification Workcentre XD SERIES
lrnage Quality Specifications Using the Side A copies (Test Pattern 82P524)
Table 1
Using the Side B copies (Test Pattern 82P524)
Table 2
DEFECT
Light Copy
Misregistration (lead edge)
Misregistration (side edge)
Skew (Paper Tray 1 )
Skew (Paper Tray 2)
Skew (BypassIAlternate Tray)
Skew (SDF)
Unfused Copy
Resolution
Using the customer's original
DEFINITION OR SPECIFICATION
The .7 solid area density block nearest the center of the copy is equal to or greater than the .7 solid area density block on the test pattern. With the dark setting selected, the .10 line pair on the test pattern is partially or completely copied. (This is a guideline only, not a specification.)
The center 10 mm reference line on the copy should be 10 mm +I-2 mm from the lead edge of a 100% copy.
The 10 mrn reference line on the two outside reference targets should be 10 mm +I- 2 mm from the front edge of a 100% copy.
Refer to the two outside reference targets on the copy to ensure that they are within 2 mm with respect to each other. (This is a guideline only, not a specification.)
Refer to the two outside reference targets on the copy to ensure that they are within 2.5 mrn with respect to each other. (This is a guideline only, not a specification.)
Refer to the two outside reference targets on the copy to ensure that they are within 2.5 mm with respect to each other. (3.5 mm when using the SDF with the bypass or the alternate tray.) (This is a guideline only, not a specification.)
Refer to the two outside reference targets on the copy to ensure that they are within 3 mm with respect to each other. (3.5 mrn when using the SDF with the bypass or the alternate tray.) (This is a guideline only, not a specification.)
Gently rub the .7 patch four times with a paper towel (twice top-to-bottom and twice side-to- side) to determine if unfused toner is present.
The 4.3 LPImm lines of all the resolution targets in both the top-to-bottom direction and the side-to-side direction should be resolved completely. (This is a guideline only, not a specifica- tion.)
DEFECT
Skipslsmears
Smudge
Magnification
Table 3
REFERENCE
Go to CQ 'I 0 Light Copy RAP.
Go to CQ 12 Misregiswation RAP
Go to CQ 12 Misregislraiion RAP.
Go to CQ 14 Skew RAP.
Go to CQ 14 Skew RAP.
Go to CQ 14 Skew RAP.
Go to CQ 14 Skew RAP.
Go to CQ 18 Unfused Copy RAP.
Go to CQ 8 Blurred image RAP
DEFINITION OR SPECIFICATION
The 2.5 LPImm array for a 100% copy should be completely resolved. (This is a guideline only, not a specification.)
After image transfer, the toner image that is not yet fused is rubbed by any part of the machine or foreign material.
The size of the image on the copy is not equal to the magnificationlreduction selected within 1 %.
Workcentre XD SERIES
REFERENCE
Go to CQ 15 SkipsiSmears.
Inspect the copy transport area between the Transfer Corotron and the Fuser for the cause of this problem
Go to CQ 21 Magnification RAP
DEFECT
Background
lmage Quality
lmage Quality Specification
DEFINITION OR SPECIFICATION
The background area is darker than the corresponding area of a black-and-white original. (Classify the background defect as occurring over the entire copy, as bands in the lead edge to the trail edge direction, or as bands in the front edge to rear edge direction.)
REFERENCE
Go to CQ 2 Background (Bands) RAP. Go to CQ 3 Background (Uniform) RAP.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
DEFECT
Black Bands (Lead Edge To Trail Edge) Banding (in the main scanning direc- tion)
Black copy
Blank 1 nearly blank copies
Lines and streaks
Residual image
Spots
Uneven density
Deletions
Black bands are present from lead edge to trail edge on the copy. 1 Go to CQ 2 Background (Bands) RAP
Table 3
DEFINITION OR SPEClFlCATlON
An electrostatic or toner image is transferred to subsequent copies. I Go to GQ 13 Residual Image RAP.
REFERENCE
Narrow, repetitive, tightly packed dark and light bands appear across the copy (in the main scanning direction).
The copy is black; there is no image or only a very faint image on the copy.
The copy is white; there is no image or only a very faint image on the copy.
One or more dark, light, or white lines appear on the copy.
Go to CQ 4 Banding RAP
Go to CQ5 Black Copy RAP (Simplex Mode).
Go to CQ 7 Blank Copy RAP Go to CQ 3 1 Lines and Streaks RAP.
NOTE: There is an intentional 2-5 mm deletion (maximum) along the lead edge of all the cop- ies. There is an intentional 3-4 mm deletion (maximum) along the trail edge of all the copies.
Dark toner spots adhere to non-image areas of the copy.
Image darkness varies across the width of the copy.
There is an area of the copy which carries no toner image or a very faint one. The deleted areas may be any shape or randomly distributed over the copy.
(Classify the deletion defect as random or repetitive spots, as deletions in the lead edge to the trail edge direction, or as deletions in the front edge to rear edge direction.)
Go to CQ 16 Spots RAP.
Go to CQ 17 Uneven Density RAP.
Go to CQ 9 Deletions (LE to TE) RAP.
lmage Quality 4/00 lmage Quality Specification 3-8 Workcentre XD SERIES
CQ 2 Background (Bands) RAP Randomly distributed toner deposits of varying density that appear as bands in the non-image areas of the copy.
Procedure Read all the Possible Causes Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Correctwe Action.
Table 1
Figure 1 Background Bands
Possible Cause Contaminated Charge Corotron
Defective Cleaning Blade
Contaminated or defective photoreceptor
DeveloperIDry Ink life exceeded.
Contaminated Document Glass
Workcentre XD SERIES
Corrective Action Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
-- Replace the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Clean the Document Glass with Lens and Mirror Cleaner and a lint-free cloth.
Image Quality
CQ 2 Background (Bands) RAP
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
GQ 3 Background (Uniform) RAP GQ 4 Banding RAP Randomly distributed toner deposits of varying density that evenly cover the non-image areas Narrow, repetitive, tightly packed dark and light bands appear across the copy (in the main of the entire copy scanning direction).
Procedure Procedure Read all the Poss~ble Causes Then check the mach~ne for the poss~ble cause and perform the Read all the Possible Causes Then check the machlne for the poss~ble cause and perform the Corrective Act~on. Corrective Action.
Table 1 Table 1
Possible Cause I Corrective Action Worn photoreceptor drive I Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Possible Cause DeveloperIDry Ink life exceeded
Defective Charge Corotron
Defective Cleaning Blade
Contaminated or defective photoreceptor
Incorrect developer bias
Image Quality 4/00 CQ 3 Background (Uniform) RAP, CQ 4 Banding RAP 3-1 o
Corrective Action Replace the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Check the developer bias voltage ( ADJ 9.1). Adjust as required. If the problem still exists, check the developer bias contacts on the DVS Harness ( PL 2.1) for damage. Repair or replace as necessary.
Workcentre XD SERIES
CQ5 Black Copy RAP (Simplex Mode) The copy is totally black with no image.
Procedure Read all the Posstble Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Correctwe Actton.
Table 1
CQ6 Black Copy RAP (Duplex Mode) Side one of a duplex copy is totally black with no image; side two copys correctly.
Possible Cause
Defectlve Exposure Lamp or connectlons
Defecttve Charge Corotron
Defectlve Power Sup- ply PWB or h~gh volt- age connectlons
Procedure
Corrective Action
Replace the Exposure Lamp Carrlage ( REP 6 2)
Remove the Drum Cartr~dge and clean the electr~cal contacts Also wlpe the contact wires on the Power Supply PWB Re~nstall the Drum Cartrtdge If the problem st111 extsts, replace the Drum Cartr~dge ( PL
8 2) Check the Power Supply PWB connecttons for contamlnatlon or dam age If the problem conttnues, replace the Power Supply PWB (PSI) ( REP 1 2)
Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action.
Table 1
4/00 Image Quality
WorkCentre XD SERIES 3-1 I CQ5 Black Copy RAP (Simplex Mode), CQ6 Black
Possible Cause
GDI Memory PWB is not fully seated
Corrective Action
Power off the machine and disconnect the power cord. Ensure that the GDI Memory PWB is fully seated. If the problem still exists, replace the GDI Memory PWB PL 7.1.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
CQ 7 Blank Copy RAP This is a copy entirely without an image.
Procedure Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action.
CQ 8 Blurred lmage RAP Poor un~form~ty or clar~ty of flne llne detail. Examlne the resolut~on targets
Procedure Read all the Poss~ble Causes Then check the mach~ne for the possible cause and perform the Correct~ve Action
Table 1 Table 1
Possible Cause Open photoreceptor ground connection
Open contact for the devel- oper bias.
Defective Transfer Corotron
Main PWB unable to pro- cess image data.
Figure 1 Blurred lmage
Corrective Action
Check the photoreceptor ground connection.
Check the contacts on the Drum Cartridge for damage or contamination.
Go to GP1. If the toner image appears on the photoreceptor, replace the TransferIDetack Corotron Assembly ( REP 9.2).
Replace the Main PWB ( REP 1 . I ) .
Possible Cause Incorrect positioning of mir- rors
Paper feed drives
Defective Fuser
Defective Drum Cartridge
Dirty electrical connections on the Drum Cartridge or TransferIDetack Corotron Assembly
lmage Quality
CQ 7 Blank Copy RAP, GQ 8 Blurred Image RAP
Corrective Action Check the alignment of the Half-Rate Carriage and the Expo- sure Lamp Carriage.
Check the drives for damage or binding.
Replace the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10.1).
Remove the Drum Cartridge and clean the electrical contacts. Also wipe the contact wires on the Power Supply PWB. Rein- stall the Drum Cartridge. If the problem still exists, replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Clean the electrical connections with film remover and a lint free cloth.
WorkCentre XD SERIES
GQ 9 Deletions (LE to TE) RAP An area of the image on the copy that has no toner or a very faint image.
Procedure Read all the Poss~ble Causes. Then check the machlne for the poss~ble cause and perform the Correctrve Act~on.
Table 1 I Possible Cause I Corrective Action Damp paper or paper curled during duplex copying
DeveloperIDry Ink life exceeded
Contaminated document glass
Contaminated Transfer1 Detack Corotron Assembly
Use fresh paper and ensure that the customer is storing the paper correctly.
Replace the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Clean the Document Glass with Lens and Mirror Cleaner and a lint-free cloth.
Clean the Transfer Corotron Wire with the Corotron Cleaner. Clean the Detack Corotron with a soft brush. If the problem
Contaminated magnetic roll
Contaminated photoreceptor
Figure 1 Deletions
still exists, replace the TransferIDetack Corotron Assembly ( REP 9.2).
Replace the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Toner blockage in Toner Car- tridge
Damaged or contaminated fuser heat or pressure roll
Burrs or contamination in the paper transport path
Contaminated Focus Correc- tion Lens in the Laser Assembly
Obstruction in the optics light path
4/00 Image Quality Workcentre XD SERIES 3-1 3 GQ 9 Deletions (LE to TE) RAP
Replace the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Check or clean the rolls or replace the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10.1).
Check and clean components in the paper transport path.
Clean the exposed, lower surface of the Focus Correction Lens
Remove the Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1) and clean the mirrors 1 through 3 with Lens and Mirror Cleaner and a lint-free cloth.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
GQ 10 Light Copy RAP The image area of a copy has low density.
Procedure Read all the Possible Causes. Then select a Corrective Action based on the Possible Cause after a check of the machine.
Table 1
I Possible Cause I Corrective Action
Damp Paper
Defective Transfer Corotron
Defective photoreceptor
CQ 11 Lines and Streaks RAP Black or white lines which appear in the direction of paper feed.
Use fresh paper and ensure that the customer is storing the paper correctly.
Clean the Transfer Corotron Wire with the Corotron Cleaner. If the problem still exists, replace the TransferIDetack Corotron Assembly ( REP 9.2).
Remove the Drum Cartridge and clean the electrical contacts. Also wipe the contact wires on the Power Supply PWB. Reinstall
DeveloperIDry Ink life exceeded
Open high voltage return line
Procedure
the Drum Cartridge. If the problem still exists, replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Replace the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Check the photoreceptor ground connection. It should be less than 100 ohms.
1. Clean the Document Glass with Lens and Mirror Cleaner and a lint-free cloth.
NOTE: Coples wlth Ilnes or streaks whlch are caused by dlrf or confam~nat~on on the Number 1 Mirror, the CCD Window, the Calibrat~on Strip or the Laser Assembly Focus Correctlon Lens are more nslble when the orlg~nal confalns halftones, photographs, or solid areas Fgure 7
2 Posltlon the customer's orlglnal on the Document Glass, select the Auto exposure set- tlng, and make one copy at 100 percent magnlficatlon and one copy at 78 percent magnl- flcat~on
3 Evaluate the coples for the presence of llnes or streaks caused by contamlnatlon
a If the posltlon of the Ilne(s) on the 100 percent and 78 percent coples changes rela- tlve to the edges of the copy paper, the contamlnatlon IS In the optlcs area, that IS, before lmage processing Perform the correctlve actlons llsted In Table 1
b If the posltlon of the Ilne(s) on the 100 percent and 78 percent coples does not change relatlve to the edges of the copy paper, the contamlnatlon IS on the Focus Correctlon Lens, that IS, after lmage processing Perform the correctlve actlons l~sted In Table 2
c. Run additional copies of the customer's original to determine if the problem is solved. If not, go to Tabie 3 and continue checking for the possible cause.
Table 1 Contamination Before lmage Processing
Gently clean the mirror using a dry cotton swab. Be careful that fibers from the swab are not left on the mirror. For stubborn con- tamination, clean the mirror with Lens and Mirror Cleaner and a lint-free cloth.
Possible Cause
Contamination on Mirror Number 1
Corrective Action
Remove the Document Cover Assembly and the Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1).
CAUTION: Use only Film Remover to clean the plastic CCD Win- dow; other solvents may damage it.
Contamination on the CCD Window
Moisten a swab with Film Remover and gently rub it across the CCD Window to remove contamination.
Clean and replace the Document Glass and the Document Cover Assembly.
Remove the Document Cover Assembly and the Document Glass Assembly ( REP & I ) , then remove the Lens Cover and the CCD Dust Cover.
Replace the CCD Dust Cover, the Lens Cover, the Document Glass, and the Document Cover Assembly.
lmage Quality 4/00 CQ 10 Light Copy RAP, CQ I 1 Lines and Streaks RAP 3-1 4 Workcentre XD SERIES
Table 1 Contamination Before lmage Processing
Clean the Calibration Strip with Film Remover and a lint free cloth.
Possible Cause
Contamination on the Cali- bration Strip
Replace the Document Glass and the Document Cover Assem- I bly.
Corrective Action
Remove the Document Cover Assembly and the Document Glass ( REP 6.1).
Table 2 Contamination After lmage Processing
Replace the Toner Cartridge and the Drum Cartridge.
Possible Cause
Contamination on Focus Correction Lens
Corrective Action
Remove the Drum Cartridge and the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Remove dust or toner deposits from the exposed surface of the lens with a dry cotton swab.
Workcentre XD SERIES
Table 3 Other Possible CauseslCorrective Actions
lmage Quality
CQ 11 Lines and Streaks RAP
Possible Cause
Contaminated Transfer Corotron Wire
The photoreceptor sur- face is damaged or con- taminated
Poor cleaning of the pho- toreceptor
The surface of the Fuser Heat Roll is damaged
Contaminated Charge Corotron
Defective photoreceptor ground
Corrective Action
Clean the Transfer Corotron Wire with the Corotron Cleaner.
Determine the cause of the damage. Replace the Drum Cartridge ( P t 8.2).
Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Determine the cause of the damage. Replace the Heat Roll ( REP 10.2).
Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Check the photoreceptor ground connection. It should be less than 100 ohms.
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Focus Correction Lens Contamination:
a Solid white line(s)
CCD Window I Contamination:
Solid black line(s)
NOTE: The appearance of these defects is exaggerated
Mirror 1 Contamination:
S, Calibration Strip - < Contamination:
Black line@); may be Focus Correction Lens
interspersed with white Black line(s) only, or black Nonuniformity:
line(s) accompanied by white line(s) Dark band pattern on
both sides
Figure 1 Line Defects: Optics Contamination and Nonuniform Focus Correction Lens (Simulates Appearance Using .45 Contrast Density Test Pattern 186.904)
image Quality 4/00
GQ 11 Lines and Streaks RAP 3-16 VVorkGentre XD SERIES
GQ 12 Misregistration RAP Paper Tray 1 and 2 Lead Edge: The center 10 mrn reference line on the copy should be 10 mm +I- 1.0 mm from the lead edge of a 100% copy.
Paper Tray 1 and 2 Side Edge: The 10 mm line on the two outs~de reference targets should be 10 mm +I- 2.0 mm from the front edge of a 100% copy.
BypasslAlternate Tray Lead Edge: The 10 rnrn line on the lead edge graduated mm scale is a maximum of 10 mm +I- 3.2 mm from the lead edge of the copy.
BypassIAlternate Tray Side Edge: The 10 mm llne on the side edge graduated rnrn scale is a maxlmum of 10 mm +I- 3.2 rnrn from the side edge of the copy.
Set Document Feeder Side Edge: The 10 mm reference line on the two outside reference targets should be 10 mm +I- 3.4 mrn from the front edge of a 100% copy.
Procedure Read all the Posslble Causes. Then check the machlne for the poss~ble cause and perform the Corrective Actlon.
Table I Lead Edge Misregistration
Figure 1 Lead Edge Misregistration
Possible Cause Incorrectly loaded paper
Damaged or worn paper feeding components.
Defective Registration Roll Solenoid (SOL3)
lncorrect value in [50-101 for the Print Start Position, the Lead Edge Deletion, or the Scan Start Position
Table 2 Side Edge Misregistration
Workcentre XD SERIES
Corrective Action Show the customer how to load paper.
Clean the feed and the registration rolls with Film Remover and a lint-free cloth. Check the components for wear or damage.
Enter Output Code 6-[2] to test the operation of the solenoid. Replace the solenoid if it binds, fails to actuate, or operates intermittently ( REP 8.2).
The default lead edge deletion is 2.5 mm. Perform the Print Start Position, Lead Edge Deletion, and Scan Start Position adjustments in the Section 6 Table 1 .
Possible Cause The s~de gulde In the paper tray IS not poslt~oned cor- rectly
lncorrect value In 50-1 0 for center offset
Image Quality
CQ 12 Misregistration RAP
Corrective Action Posltlon the s~de gulde correctly.
Perform the Center Offset Adjustment procedure In the Sectlon 6 Table I .
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
GQ 13 Residual lmage RAP This is an image that is repeated on the same copy or consecutive copies.
Procedure Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action.
Table 1
Possible Cause I Corrective Action I
LEAD EDGE 1 ( SIDE A
- - - "=
-, =;.
Image repeated every 3.1 inches (79 mm) on copy
Image repeated every 3.7 inches (94 mm) on copy
Poor cleaning of the photore- ceptor
Rogm h mFnmfel r szd j a l ,111 -- n IE a l l h '70 = - . 1 ' ' - , = --F-r-,.Sl . . &: ' - - t 1 1 i - .27
Rogm h rnFnmfei r s z d l a l 1 1 1 n IE ailh .35B
7 ., = .. Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Replace the Heat Roll ( REP 10.2).
Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Figure 1 Residual lmage
lmage Quality 4/00 CQ 13 Residual image RAP 3-1 8 VVorkCentre XD SERIES
CQ 64 Skew RAP The image is skewed because the paper is skewed or the optics components are misadjusted and distort the image.
Procedure Read all the Posslble Causes. Then check the machlne for the posslble cause and perform the Correctwe Action.
Table 1
Figure 1 Skew
Possible Cause Paper Tray problem
The paper is not loaded cor- rectly
Damaged or contamlnated paper feed rollers, reglstratlon roller, or transport rollers
incorrect settlng In 51 -[2]
Optics problem
Worn or contamlnated SDF Retard Roller, Feed Roller, or Transport Roller
SDF Front and Rear Guides incorrectly posltloned
Obstruction in the SDF docu- ment path
Mlsallgnment of the SDFJDSDF Assembly
WorkCentre XD SERIES
Corrective Action Check the condition of the front and rear paper tray snub- bers Repalr as requlred ( PL 4 I ) Ensure the paper tray guldes are correctly set Repalr as requlred ( PL 4 1)
Show the customer how to load paper
Clean the paper feed and the reglstratlon rollers, and the Slngle Bypass Transport Rollers wlth Fllm Remover and a lint-free cloth Check the components for wear or damage Replace as required. The Paper Feed Roller ( REP 8 6) and the Lower Reglstra- tlon Roller ( REP 8 1 3) The Ex~t Roller ( REP 8 9) and the Lower Transport Roller ( REP8 11) The Transport Roller ( REP 8 7)
Perform the Reglstratlon Buckle adjustment In the Section 6 labie 1
Go to CQ 20 Distortion RAP
Clean the rollers w~th F~ lm Remover and a Ilnt-free cloth Check the components for wear or damage Replace as required
Show the customer how to load orlglnals In the SDF
Open the SDF Feed Assembly and check for obstructions Remove any obstructions which are present
Allgn the SDFIDSDF Assembly (ADJ 5 1)
Image Quality
CQ 14 Skew RAP
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Areas of the image on the copy are blurred. This occurs at the image transfer area.
The 2.5 LPImm ladder lines are not completely clearly visible.
Procedure Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action.
Table 1 Possible Cause Defective TransferIDetack Corotron Assembly
Worn or damaged paper feed components.
Contaminated or damaged scan rails
Damp or curled paper
LEAD EDGE I Wn tonride P v m fo hta
Corrective Action Replace the TransferIDetack Corotron Assembly ( REP 9.2).
Clean the paper feed and registration rollers, and Single Bypass Transport Roller with Film Remover and a lint-free cloth. Check the components for wear or damage. Replace as required: The Paper Feed Roller ( REP 8.6) and the Lower Registration Roller ( REP 8.1 3) The Exit Roller ( REP 8.9) and the Lower Transport Roller ( REP 8.1 1) The Transport Roller ( REP 8.7)
Remove the Document Cover Assembly and the Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1). Do not remove any other compo- nents in the optics area. Clean the carriage rails with a lint free towel. Replace the half rate carriage scan rails if they are damaged ( PL 3.1).
Use fresh paper and ensure that the customer is storing the
Dirty electrical connections on the Drum Cartridge or the TransferIDetack Corotron Assembly
ervC, h e t e s iyml ursp ovolrege Wuodl ouy 1 yrou tlem I I daer "do eoyvru ah* genb e d l s l t m e i nad f 9 f s z t Tlhz e t s t aotetnr: a utmeD
paper correctly.
Clean the connections with film remover and a lint free cloth as required.
. . I enerjlep aer nelcs~d'e
Figure 1 Skips and Smears
Image Quality
GQ 15 SkipsfSmears
CQ 15 Spots RAP Circular black spots or irregular shaped black images on the copy.
Procedure Read all the Poss~ble Causes Then check the mach~ne for the possible cause and perform the Correctwe Act~on.
Table 4
SIZE OF BACK- GROUND SPOT
I I I
Possible Cause
Contam~nated document glass
Damp or wrrnkled paper
Defectwe, damaged or contam~nated photorecep- tor
Contam~nated fuser heat roll
Worn magnetic roll
Contam~nated Registra- tron Roll Figure 1 Spots
Corrective Action
Clean the Document Glass w~th Lens and Wl~rror Cleaner and a I~nt-free cloth
Use fresh paper and ensure that the customer IS storing the paper correctly.
Replace the Drum Cartr~dge ( PL 8 2)
Replace the Heat Roll ( REP 40 2).
Replace the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8 2)
Clean the Registrat~on Roll
4/00 image Quality
Workcentre XD SERIES 3-21 GQ 16 Spots RAP
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
CQ 17 Uneilen Density RAP The density and line thickness vary across the copy.
CQ 18 Unfused Copy RAP The characters or image are easily wiped off a copy.
Procedure Procedure Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action. Corrective Action.
Table 1
Possible Cause
Defective or contaminated photoreceptor
Contaminated Transfer Corotron
DeveloperlDry Ink life exceeded
Low toner
Dirty Mirrors
Image Quality 4/00
GQ 17 Uneven Density RAP, GQ 18 Unfused Copy 3-22 Workcentre XD SERIES
Corrective Action
Replace the Drum Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Clean the Transfer Corotron Wire with the Corotron Cleaner ( PL 5.3). If the problem still exists, replace the Transfer1 Detack Corotron Assembly ( REP 9.2).
Replace the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Replace the Toner Cartridge ( PL 8.2).
Remove the Document Cover Assembly and the Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1) and clean the mirrors 1 through 3 with Lens and Mirror Cleaner and a lint-free cloth.
Table 1
Possible Cause
Damp Paper
Incorrect Fuser temperature
Defective Fuser Heat or Pressure Roll
Corrective Action
Use fresh paper and ensure that the customer is storing the paper correctly.
Ensure that the Fuser temperature is set correctly for the cus- tomer paper that is used most often. Heavy weight paper may require a higher temperature. Light weight paper may require a lower temperature. Refer to the appropriate parameter adjustment table in Sec- tion 6: - Adjustment Codes - Table 1 Programmable Features Settings - Table 1 Configuration Codes
Replace the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10.1).
CQ 19 Wrinkle RAP CQ 20 Distortion RAP This is damage that is probably caused by the Fuser. This is a severe case of creases that run Two types of image distortion can be attributed to misadjustment of the optics components - in the direction of paper travel. horizontal image distortion (Figure 1) and vertical image distortion ( Figure 2).
Procedure Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action.
NOTE: Wrinkles may occur when envelopes are run. Refer to the User Guide for information on running envelopes.
Table 1
Possible Cause I Corrective Action Damp paper I Use fresh paper and ensure that the customer IS storing the
NOTE: Perform the checks in GQ 14 Skew RAP before checking the optics components.
Damaged or contami- nated paper feed rollers, registration roller, or trans- port rollers
Damaged or contami- nated Fuser Heat Roll or Pressure Roll
Procedure
paper correctly.
Clean all of the paper feed and transport rollers with Film Remover and a lint-free cloth. Check the components for wear or damage.
Replace as required either the Heat Roll ( Pb 6.1) ( REP 10.2), the Pressure Roll ( PL 6.2)( REP 10.3), or both.
Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action.
Figure 1 Horizontal lmage Distortion Examples
Table 1
Figure 2 Vertical lmage Distortion Examples
Possible Cause Half Rate Carriage or Exposure Lamp Carriage misadjusted
The Left or the Right Half Rate Carriage Scan Rail is misadjusted
WorkCentre XD SERIES
Corrective Action Go to ADJ 6.7.
Go to ADJ 6.7.
lmage Quality
GQ 19 Wrinkle RAP, GQ 20 Distortion RAP
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
CQ 21 Magnification RAP 661 22 image Displacement RAP The image on the copy is not within specification for the selected magnification.
Initial Actions Replace the copy paper with a new supply.
Ensure that the optics are clean.
Procedure Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action.
Part of the image information is placed elsewhere on the copy or is completely missing. The area of the missing information is sharply defined, as in Figure 1, where the right side of the image is displaced to the left side. lmage displacement is unlike deletions, where the image is not sharply defined or clear.
Table 1
Procedure
Possible Cause Incorrect value in 48- [ I ]
lmage Processing Prob- lem
Read all the Possible Causes. Then check the machine for the possible cause and perform the Corrective Action.
Corrective Action If the LensICCD Module was removed, reinstall it to the refer- ence position ( ADJ 6.2). Perform ADJ 6.7. Perform ADJ 6.8.
Replace the Main PWB ( REP 1.1).
Possible Cause Defective Main PWB is providing inaccurate infor- mation to the Laser Mod-
Table 1
Corrective Action Replace the Main PWB (REP 1 . I ) .
Figure 1 lmage displacement example
lmage Quality 4/00 CQ 21 Magnification RAP, CQ 22 image Displacement 3-24 Workcentre XD SERIES
4 . Repairs and Adjustments Repairs
Electrical REP 1 . 1 Main PWB ........................................................................................................ REP 1 . 2 Power Supply PWB (PSI) ................................................................................ REP 1.3 Control Console PWB ....................................................................................... REP 1.4 Power Receptacle .............................................................................................
. . Main Drive
REP 4.1 Main Drive Motor (MOTI) ................................................................................. Notes: ..............................................................................................................................
SDFIDSDF REP 5.1 SDF Assembly ........................... .. .................................................................. REP 5.2 SDF Sensor PWB ............................................................................................ REP 5.3 Feed Solenoid (SOLI) ...................................................................................... REP 5.4 Clutch .......................... ........ .............................................................................. REP 5.5 Feed Roller / Retard Roller ............................................................................. REP 5.6 Exit Drive Belt ................................................................................................... REP 5.7 SDF Drive Motor (MOTI) ............................................................................... REP 5.8 Document Path Sensor ((23) .......................................................................... REP 5.9 Transport Roller .................... .. ..................................................................... REP 5.1 0 Exit Roller ....................................................................................................... REP 5.15 DSDF Assembly ............................................................................................ REP 5.16 DSDF Sensor PWB ....................................................................................... REP 5.17 DSDF Feed Solenoid (SOL1) ............................ .. ....................................... REP 5.1 8 DSDF Feed Clutch .............. .. ..................................................................... REP 5.1 9 DSDF Feed Roller/Retard Roller .................................................................... REP 5.20 DSDF Drive Motor (MOTI) ............................... ......... ..................................... REP 5.21 DSDF Document Path Sensor (Q3) ................................................................ REP 5.22 DSDF Feed Assembly .................................................................................... REP 5.23 DSDF Transport Assembly ............................................................................. REP 5.24 DSDF Pinch Roll Solenoid (SOL2) .......................... .. .................................. REP 5.25 DSDF Exit Roller ............... .. ........................................................................ REP 5.26 DSDF Transport Roller ................................................................................ REP 5.27 DSDF Duplex Transport Roller ...................................................................... REP 5.28 DSDF Duplex Drive Roller .............................................................................. REP 5.29 DSDF Deflection Gate Solenoid (SOL3) ........................................................
... REP 5.30 DSDF Exit Drive Motor (MOT5) ...................................................................... REP 5.31 DSDF Clutch (CL1) .........................................................................................
Optics REP 6.1 Document Glass Assembly .............................................................................. REP 6.2 Exposure Lamp Carriage ..................... .. ...................................................... REP 6.3 Scan Drive Motor (MOT2) ............... .. ..........................................................
Paper Feed REP 8.1 Paper Feed Solenoid (SOL1 ) .................................... ... .....................................
.................................................................... REP 8.2 Registration Roll Solenoid (SOL3) ......................... ..................................................... REP 8.3 Paper Feed Sensor (Ql ) ..
...................................................... REP 8.4 Bypass Feed Sensor (Q2) (XDIOO/XD102) ............................................................................ REP 8.5 Tray Detect Switch Harness
REP 8.6 Paper Feed Roller ............................................................................................ ............................... .................................... REP 8.7 Transport Roller (XD100/XD102) ...
REP 8.8 Side Door Interlock Switch (S3lS4) ................................................................... REP 8.9 Exit Roller .................... .. ..............................................................................
..................................................................................... REP 8.1 0 Manual Exit Drive Belt .................................................................................. REP 8.1 1 Lower Transport Roller
................................... ............................................... REP 8.1 2 Main Drive Assembly .... REP 8.1 3 Lower Registration Roller ................................................................................ REP 8.14 Tray Detect Switch (S2) ..................................................................................
......................................................................................... REP 8.1 5 Feed Roll (XD104) ........................................................................................ REP 8.1 6 Retard Roll (XD104)
........................................... ................................... REP 8.1 7 Feed Solenoid (XD104) .... .................................. ........................... REP 8.20 Tray 2 paper Feed Sensor (Q7) ..
...................... ................................................ REP 8.21 Tray 2 Detect Switch (S5) .... REP 8.22 Tray 2 Paper Feed Solenoid (SOL2) ............................................................. REP 8.23 Tray 2 Transport Roller .................... .. .......................................................... REP 8.24 Tray 2 Paper Feed Clutch ..................... .. ..... .... ....................................... REP 8.25 Tray 2 Feed Roller ...................... .. ...........................................................
Xerographies REP 9.1 Toner Motor (MOT4) ................................................................................ REP 9.2 TransferIDetack Corotron Assembly ................................................................. Notes: ..............................................................................................................................
Copy Transportation & Fusing .............................................................................................. REP 10.1 Fuser Assembly
........................... ....................................................................... REP 10.2 Heat Roll .. REP 10.3 Pressure Roll ...............................................................................................
............................................................................................. REP 10.4 Thermistor (RTI) ..................... ........................................................ REP 10.5 Fuser Jam Sensor (Q3) .. .................................................................................. REP 10.6 Ventilation Fan (MOT 3)
REP 10.7 Exit Sensor ((24) ............................................................................................. REP 10.8 Heat Rod .........................................................................................................
.................................................................................................. REP 10.9 Thermostat REP 10.1 0 Paper Guide .................................................................................................. REP 10.1 1 Stripper Fingers .........................................................................................
.................................................................................................... REP 10.12 Fuser Gate
REP 6.4 Laser Module .................................................................................................... 4-53 covers ............................................................................................. REP 6.5 Lens/CCD ............................................................................................ 4-53 REP 14.5 Control Console 4-101
................................................................................................ ...................................................... REP 6.6 Optics Frame 4-54 REP 14.7 Output Tray 4-101
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Notes: .............................................................................................................................
Adjustments
SDFIDSDF ADJ 5.1 SDFIDSDF Skew ..............................................................................................
Optics ............................... .......................................... ADJ 6.1 Copy Density (Exposure) .........
ADJ 6.2 LensJCCD Module ............................................................................................ ........................................................ ADJ 6.7 lmage Distortion (Horizontal and Vertical)
.......................................................................................... ADJ 6.8 lmage Magnification
Paper Feed ........................................................................................... ADJ 8.2 Lead Edge Deletion
ADJ 8.3 Trail Edge Deletion ............................................................................................ .................................................................................... ADJ 8.4 Lead Edge Registration
.................................... ........................... ADJ 8.5 SDFIDSDF Lead Edge Registration ...
Paper Feed ADJ 9.1 Developer Bias ................................................................................................. ADJ 9.2 Grid Bias ............................................................................................................
Repairs and Adjustments
Workcentre XD SERIES
REP 1.1 Main PWB Parts List on PL 7.1 Removal
WARNIING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.
CAUTION Record ail Conf!giguration Codes before removlng the Main PWB (refer to Seci",on 6, Goni~gigura I/on Codes)
1 Remove the Document Cover Assembly
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
3. Remove the SIX screws and the PWB Cover (PL 7 I)
4. Disconnect all the Rlbbon Cables and Harnesses from the Ma~n PWB
5. Remove the six mount~ng screws and the Maln PWB.
Replacement 1. If the Main PWB is being replaced, carefully remove the GDI Memory PWB from the old
PWB and install it on the new PWB.
2. Reassemble the Copier.
3. Enter diagnostics and reset any Configuration Codes that were different than the factory defaults.
4. If the Main PWB has been replaced, perform the following:
a. Copy Density (AD4 6.1)
b. Image Magnification (AD$ 6.8)
c. Lead Edge Registration (AD4 8.4)
d. SDFIDSDF Lead Edge Registration (ADJ 8.5 )
e. Lead Edge Deletion (ADJ 8.2)
f. Trail Edge Deletion (ADJ 8.3)
g. Center Offset Adjustments (refer to Section 6 Adjustment Codes)
REP 1.2 Power Supply PWB (PSI) Parts List on PL %*I Removal
WARNING Switch OM the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the Document Cover Assembly.
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
3. Remove the Top Left Cover.
4. Remove the Output Tray (REP 14.7).
5. Move the Power Receptacle (REP 1.4).
6. (Figure I): Remove the Power Supply PWB.
2 Disconnect the connectors
3 Remove the PWB
1 Remove the screws
Figure 1 Removing the Power Supply PWB
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 1 . I , REP "12
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 1.3 Control Console PWB Parts List on Pk 1.3 Removal
WARN1NG Switch off the Main Power Swsitch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the Control Console (REP '14.5).
2. (Figure 4) : Remove the Control Console PWB.
1 Remove the screws (6) and the Control Cons @ A
Remove the PWB from
Figure 1 Removing the Control Console PWB
Cover
2 Remove screws (
SKYOOTN
REP 1.4 Power Receptacle Parts List on PL 7.1 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the Document Cover Assembly.
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
3. Remove the Top Left Cover.
4. Remove the Output Tray (REP 14.7).
NOTE: The Power Receptacle is wired to the Power Supply PWB. This procedure shows how to detach it from the Base Assembly
5. (Figure 1): Move the Power Receptacle from its position on the Base Assembly.
3 Push the wires and the receptacle through the hole \
screws
Figure 1 Moving the Power Receptacle
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 1.3, REP 1.4
REP 4.1 Main Drive Motor (MOT1) Parts List on PL 2.2 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Maim Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.
1. Remove the Document Cover Assembly.
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
3. (Figure 1): Remove the Maln Drlve Motor.
Notes:
3 Remove motor
Disconnect the Ribbon Cable
the
Remove the screws
Figure 1 Removing the Main Drive Motor
Repairs and Adjustments
Workcentre XD SERIES
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Repairs and Adjustments 4/00
REP 4.1, 4-6 VVorkCentre XD SERIES
REP 5.1 SDF Assembly Parts List on PL 9-1 A Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord
1. Remove the Rear Cover.
2. Remove the six screws and the PWB Cover (PL 7.1)
NOTE: Cut cable ties or release cable clamps as necessary
3. Disconnect the ground wire and cable comlng from the SDF Assembly
4 Lift the SDF Assembly up slowly off the Document Glass Whlle tilting the hinges In the rear dlrectlon, lift the hlnges out of the hinge guldes
REP 5.2 SDF Sensor PWB Parts List on PL 9.2 Removal
WARNiNG Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. (Figure 1): Remove the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.
2 Remove the
1 Release the tabs underneath the SDF Assembly
Figure 1 Removing the Covers
2. (Figure 2): Remove the SDF Feed Assembly.
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.1, REP 5.2
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
2 Remove the spring
\
Remove the screws, the Document Guide, and the SDF Feed
8"' , Disconnect the two connectors
Figure 2 Removing the SDF Feed Assembly
3. (Figure 3): Remove the Top Cover.
2 Remove the Top Cover A
1 Remove the screws
Figure 3 Removing the Top Cover
4. (Figure 4): Remove the SDF Sensor PWB.
Repairs and Adjustments 4/00 REP 5.2 4-8 Workcentre XD SERIES
1 Remove the screws
REP 5.3 Feed Solenoid (SOL11 Parts List on PL 9.2 Removal
WARNING Switch off t he Main Power Switch. Disconnect " re Power Cord. 1 . (Figure 1): Remove the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.
2 Remove the SDF Sensor PWB and disconnect the connector
0500004A-SKY
Figure 4 Removing the SDF Sensor PWB
2 Remove the covers
1 Release the tabs underneath the SDF Assembly
Figure 1 Removing the Covers
2. (F~gure 2): Remove the SDF Feed Assembly.
WorkCentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.2, REP 5.3
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
2 Remove
Remove the screws. the Document Guide, and the SDF Feed
Disconnect the two connectors
Figure 2 Removing the SDF Feed Assembly
3. (Figure 3): Remove the Top Cover.
2 Remove the Tor, Cover A
1 Remove the screws
Figure 3 Removing the Top Cover
4. (Figure 4): Remove the Feed Solenoid.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.3 Workcentre XD SERIES
Disconnect the plunger and remove the solenoid
1 Remove the screws
Figure 4 Removing the Feed Solenoid
Replacement CAUTION
l f tile posibon of the Feed Soienoid (SOLIJ IS adjusted too far lo the left the Iravei of the piunger wiii be reslr~cied and it wiil be unaoie to fuiiy actuate the Paper Gate and the Feed Roiler I f necessary, adjust the poslt~on of the Feed Solenold (SOLI) sl~ghtly to ensure that the Feed Clutch Pawl clears the Clutch when the Feed Solenold plunger IS held In the energized posi-
REP 5.4 Clutch Parts List on PL 9.2 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect %he Power Cord, 1. (Figure 1): Remove the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.
2 Remove the
I] Release the tabs underneath the SDF Assembly
Figure 1 Removing the Covers
t~on 2 (Figure 2): Remove the SDF Feed Assembly.
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.3, REP 5.4
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
2 Remove the spring a
1 . Remove \ p/ the belt
Remove the screws, the Document Guide, and the SDF Feed
Disconnect the two connectors
Figure 2 Removing the SDF Feed Assembly
3. (Figure 3): Remove the Top Cover.
2 Remove the Top Cover
1 Remove the screws
Figure 3 Removing the Top Cover
4. (Figure 4): Prepare to remove the clutch.
Repairs and Adjustments 4/00 REP 5.4 4-1 2 WorkCentre XD SERIES
Remove the pulley and the bearing
1 Remove the E-ring
remove the shaft
Move the bushing out of the frame
2 Remove the clutch components
Figure 5 Removing the Clutch
Replacement CAUTION
if We position of the Feed Soienoid (SOL?) is adjusted too far to the left, the travel of the plunger wiii be restricted and it will be unable to fully actuate the Paper Gale and the Feed Roller.
If necessary, adjust the position of the Feed Solenoid (SOL?) slightly to ensure that the Feed Clutch Pawl clears the Clutch when the Feed Solenoid plunger is held in the energized posi- tion.
0500006A-SKY
Figure 4 Preparing to Remove the Clutch
5. (Figure 5) : Remove the clutch.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.4
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 5.5 Feed Roller / Retard Roller Parts List on Pk 9.2 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Powel Switch. Desconnect the Power Cord. 1. (F~gure I ) : Remove the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.
2 Remove the covers
1 Release the tabs underneath the SDF Assembly
Figure 1 Removing the Covers
2. (Figure 2): Remove the SDF Feed Assembly.
2 Remove the spring
\
I \ Remove the screws, the Document Gu~de, and the SDF Feed
/ Assembly
1 Disconnect the two connectors
Figure 2 Removing the SDF Feed Assembly
3. (Figure 3): Remove the Top Cover.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.5 VVorkCentre XD SERIES
1 Remove the Dressure
2 Remove the Top Cover
Figure 3 Removing the Top Cover
4. (figure 4): Remove the Feed Roller Assembly.
spring from the Paper Gate and move the gate out of the way
3 Remove the Feed Roller Assembly
Move the Feed Roller Assembly against the tension spring and move the bearina out of the - frame
Figure 4 Removing the Feed Roller Assembly
5. (Figure 5): Remove the Retard Roller.
4/00 Repairs and Adjustments
Workcentre XD SERIES 4-1 5 REP 5.5
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
1 Pull the gear end of the roller out of the frame
NOTE: Be careful not to lose the Feed Shaft bear- ings
2 Move the E-ring and the Feed Shaft
REP 5.6 Exit Drive Belt Parts List on PL 9.3 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch, Disconnect the Power Cord, 1. (Figure I ) : Remove the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.
2 Remove the covers h,
1 Release the tabs underneath the SDF Assembly
Feed Shaft
Figure 5 Removing the Retard Roller
Figure 1 Removing the Covers
2. (Figure 2): Remove the SDF Feed Assembly.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.5, REP 5.6 Workcentre XD SERIES
2 Remove the spring
\
Remove the screws, the Document Guide, and the SDF Feed
Disconnect the two connectors
Figure 2 Removing the SDF Feed Assembly
3. (Figure 3): Remove the Document Tray.
Remove the two screws and the Document Tray
Figure 3 Removing the Document Tray
4. (Figure 4): Remove the Exit Drive Belt.
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.6
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 5.7 SDF Drive Motor (MOTI) Parts List on PL 9.3 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Swibeirs. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. (Figure 1): Remove the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.
2 Remove the covers
\ 1 Remove the belt from the pulley
Figure 4 Removing the Exit Drive Belt
Figure 11 Removing the Covers
2. (Figure 2): Remove the SDF Feed Assembly.
"I Release the tabs / underneath the SDF Assembly
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.6, REP 5.7 Workcentre XD SERIES
2 Remove the spring
Remove the screws, the Document Guide, and the SDF Feed
, ..,-- Disconnect the two connectors
Figure 2 Removing the SDF Feed Assembly
3. (Figure 3): Remove the Document Tray.
Document
\ / Tray
2 Remove the five screws and the SDF Transport
SDF Transport Assembly
Remove the two screws and the Document Tray
Figure 3 Removing the Document Tray
4. (Figure 4): Remove the Exit Drive Belt.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.7
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
1 Remove the belt from the pulley
Figure 4 Removing the Exit Drive Belt
5. (Figure 5): Remove the SDF Drive Motor.
3 Remove the screw and
Remove the four the post that holds the screws and the Motor Mounting Plate
NOTE: Do not remove the screws from the rear
Remove
connector
NOTE: Make sure the Drive Belt is positioned this way during reassembly
Figure 5 Removing the SDF Drive Motor
Repairs and Adjustments 4/00 REP 5.7 4-20 Workcentre XD SERIES
REP 5.8 Document Path Sensor (Q3) Parts List on PL 9.3 Removal
WARNING Switch off t he Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.
1. (Figure 1). Remove the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.
2 Remove the covers
Figure I Removing the Covers
2. (Figure 2): Remove the SDF Feed Assembly
2 Remove the spring
\
1 Release the tabs underneath the SDF Assembly
two connectors
0500002A-SKY
Figure 2 Removing the SDF Feed Assembly
3. (Figure 3): Remove the Document Tray.
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.8
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Tray 2 Remove the five screws and the SDF Transport
Figure 3 Removing the Document Tray
4. (Figure 4): Remove the Exit Drive Belt.
SDF Transport Assembly
1 Remove the belt from the pulley
Remove the two screws and the Document Tray
Figure 4 Removing the Exit Drive Belt
5. (Figure 5): Remove the Document Path Sensor.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.8 Workcentre XD SERIES
2 Release the sensor mounting tabs and remove the sensor
3 Disconnect the connector
Loosen the screw until the Document Exit Guide swings down and out of the way
REP 5.9 Transport Roller Parts List on PL 9.3 Removal
WARNING Owlkh off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1 . (Figure 1): Remove the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.
2 Remove the covers
1 Release the tabs underneath the SDF Assembly
/ Document Exit Guide
0500013A-SKY
Figure 5 Removing the Document Path Sensor
Figure 1 Removing the Covers
2. (Figure 2): Remove the SDF Feed Assembly.
Workcentre XD SERIES Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.8, REP 5.9
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
2 Remove the spring
a,
two connectors
0500002A-SKY
Figure 2 Removing the SDF Feed Assembly
(Figure 3): Remove the Document Tray.
Document Tray
2 Remove the five screws and the SDF Transport
Figure 3 Removing the Document Tray
4. (Figure 4): Remove the Exit Drive Belt.
SDF Transport Assembly
Remove the two screws and the Document Tray
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.9 Workcentre XD SERlES
&*, Remove the belt from the pulley
Figure 4 Removing the Exit Drive Belt
5. (Figure 5): Remove the Transport Roller.
Document Exit Guide
2 Remove the E-rings and bearings and remove the Transport Roller
Loosen the screw until the Document Exit Guide swings down and out of the way
Figure 5 Removing the Transport Roller
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.9
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 5.10 Exit Roller Parts List on PL 9.3 Removal
WARNiNG Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord, 1. (Figure 1): Remove the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.
2 Remove the covers
1 Release the tabs underneath the SDF Assembly
2 Remove rn
the spring a \a Remove "\ / the belt
4 Remove the screws. the Document Gu~de, and the SDF Feed
I Disconnect the two connectors
Figure 2 Removing the SDF Feed Assembly
3. (Figure 3): Remove the Document Tray.
Figure 1 Removing the Covers
2. (Figure 2): Remove the SDF Feed Assembly.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.10 Workcentre XD SERIES
Document Tray -
Z Remove the five screws
A and the SDF Transport
Figure 3 Removing the Document Tray
4. ( Figure 4): Remove the Exit Drive Belt.
SDF Transport Assembly
Remove the belt from \ I the pulley
Remove the two screws and the Document Tray
Figure 4 Removing the Exit Drive Belt
5. ( Figure 5): Remove the Exit Roller.
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.16
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 5.15 DSDF Assembly Parts List on PL 9.18
2 Remove the E-rings and bearings and remove the Exit Roller
Document Exit Guide
1 Loosen the screw until the Document Exit Guide swings down and out of the way
Removal WARNiNG
Switch off the Main Power Switch. B~sconneei the Power Cord. 1. Remove the Document Cover/Document Feeder Assembly from the h~nges and place it
on top of the machine.
2. (F~gure 1). Remove the Rear Cover and the Access Cover.
1 Remove the four
s c r e w s ~ 9
J 0500015A-SKY
Figure 5 Removing the Exit Roller 0500030a
Figure 1 Removing the Covers
3. (Figure 2): Remove the PWB Cover.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.10, REP 5.15
Document Cover Closed
Remove the six screws and remove the cover
0500031a
Figure 2 Removing the PWB Cover
4. (Figure 3): Remove the Document Feeder Assembly.
0500038a
Figure 3 Removing the Document Feeder Assembly
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.15
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 5.16 DSDF Sensor PWB Parts List on PL 9.2 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5.22).
2. (Figure I): Remove the Feed Assembly Top Cover.
Feed Assembly Top Cover
Remove the two screws and remove the Feed Assembly Top Cover
Feed Assembly Top Cover
Remove the two screws and
1 Re screws
2 Remove the DSDF Sensor PWB and disconnect the con- nector
0500043a
Figure 2 Removing the DSDF Sensor PWB
Figure 1 Removing the Top Cover
3. (Figure 2): Remove the DSDF Sensor PWB.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.16 Workcentre XD SERIES
REP 5.117 DSDF Feed Solenoid (SOhl) Parts List on PL 9.2 Removal
WARNING Switch OH the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.
1 Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5 22).
2. (F~gure 1). Remove the Feed Assembly Top Cover.
Sensor PWB and disconnect the con- nector
0500044a
Remove the two screws and Figure 2 Removing the DSDF Feed Solenoid (SOLI)
remove the Feed Assembly Replacement
CAUTION 0500042a
I f the position of the DSDF Feed Solenoid (SOL 1) is adjusted too far to the /eft the travei of the plunger wi/\ be restricted and it will be unabie lo fully actuate the Paper Gale and the Feed
Figure 1 Removing the Top Cover Roller If necessary, adjust the position of the DSDF Feed Solenoid (SOLI) slightly to ensure that the
3. (Figure 2): Remove the DSDF Feed Solenoid (SOL1). Feed Clutch Pawl clears the Clutch when the DSDF Feed Solenoid plunger is held in the ener- gized position.
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.17
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 5.18 DSDF Feed Clutch Parts List on PE 9.2 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly ( REP 5.22).
2. ( Figure I ) : Remove the Feed Assembly Top Cover.
Feed Assembly Top Cover
Remove the two screws and remove the Feed Assembly Top Cover
Figure 1 Removing the Top Cover
3. (Figure 2 ) : Remove the DSDF Feed Clutch Assembly.
2 Lift the clutch pawl and remove the DSDF Feed Clutch Assemblv \
1 Remove the E-Ring and the pulley and bushing
NOTE: During reassembly, place the iron core onto the solenoid arm
/ Bushing moved out \
Figure 2 Removing the DSDF Feed Clutch Assembly
4. (Figure 3): Remove the DSDF Feed Clutch.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.18 Workcentre XD SERIES
Remove the E-Ring and remove the feed clutch
REP 5.19 DSDF Feed RollerIRetard Roller Parts List on PL 9.2 Removal
WARNING Switch of the Main Power Switch, Disconnect the Power Card. 1. Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5.22). 2. (Figure 1): Remove the Feed Assembly Top Cover.
Clutch
Figure 3 Removing the DSDF Feed Clutch
Replacement CAUTION
If the posibon of the DSDF Feed Solenoid (SOL I ) 1s adjusted too far lo the ieft, the fravei of the piunger wiii be resfncfcd and 11 wli be unable lo fully actuate the Paper Gale and the Feed Ro//er
If necessary, adjust the position of the DSDF Feed Solenoid (SOLI) slightly to ensure that the Feed Clutch Pawl clears the DSDF Feed Clutch when the DSDF Feed Solenoid plunger is held in the energized position.
Remove the two screws and remove the Feed Ass€ Top Cover
Figure 1 Removing the Top Cover
3. (Figure 2) Remove the DSDF Feed RollerIRetard Roller Assembly.
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.1 8, REP 5.1 9
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Paper ( Spring
NOTE: During reassembly, place the Feed Assembly onto the solenoid arm I
Remove the Paper Gate Spring from the Paper Gate and move the gate
Remove the Feed RollerIRetard Roller
Move the Feed RollerIRetard Roller Assembly against the tension spring and move the bearing out of the frame
0500047a
Remove the Paper Gate Spring from the Paper Gate and move the gate
Tension Spring
Remove the Feed RollerIRetard Roller
Move the Feed RollerIRetard Roller Assembly against the tension sarina
Figure 2 Removing the Feed Assembly
4. (Figure 3): Remove the DSDF Feed Roller or Retard Roller.
2 Remove the pin and gear and remove the
NOTE: Be careful not to lose the Feed Shaft gears or bushings
shaft and remove the Feed Roller 0500048a
Figure 3 Removing the DSDF Feed Roller or Retard Roller
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.19 4/00 4-34 Workcentre XD SERIES
REP 5.20 DSDF Drive Motor (MOT1) Parts List on PL 9.4 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.
1. Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5.22).
2. Remove the DSDF Transport Assembly (REP 5.23).
3. (F~gure 1): Remove the DSDF Drive Motor (MOTl).
DSDF Dr~ve Motor (MOTl)
\
2 Remove the two screws and remove Drive Motor (MOTl)
\ 1 Disconnect the connector
REP 5.21 DSDF Document Path Sensor (Q3) Parts List on Pb 9-15: Removal
WARNiNG Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.
1. Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5.22).
2. Remove the DSDF Transport Assembly (REP 5.23).
3. (Figure 1): Remove the Document Guide.
1 Remove the two screws and remove the Document Guide
0500052a
Figure 1 Removing the Drive Motor (MOT1)
Figure 1 Removing the Document Guide
4. (Figure 2): Remove the DSDF Transport Roller
Guide
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.20, REP 5.21
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
DSDF Transport Roller
0500056a
Figure 2 Removing the Duplex Transport Roller
5. (Figure 3): Remove the SDF Document Path Sensor (Q3)
3 Disconnect the connector
Pinch the Tabs and push them through the frame to remove the sensor
Sensor Tabs
/ Document Guide
, I Loosen the screw until the Document Guide is released, and move it in the direction shown
Figure 3 Removing the Document Path Sensor (Q3)
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.21 Workcentre XD SERIES
REP 5.22 DSDF Feed Assembly Parts List on Pi 9.2 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect t he Power Cord
1. (Flgure 1). Remove the Duplex Tray
0500039a
Figure 1 Removing the Duplex Tray
2. (Figure 2 ) : Remove the DSDF Cover.
-A Remove the four screws, and remove the DSDF Cover
Figure 2 Removing the DSDF Cover
3. (Figure 3): Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.22
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 5.23 DSDF Transport Assembly Parts List on PL 9.4
Remove the Tension Spring, the Drive Belt, and remove the DSDF Feed Assembly
isconnect the two connectors
0500041a
Figure 3 Removing the DSDF Feed Assembly
Removal WARNING
Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5.22).
2. (Figure I): Remove the Transport Assembly.
2 Disconnect connector
NOTE: Observe the position of the
Deflection Ga p~nch roll sole- Solenold n o ~ d bracket
Remove the two screws and remove the Document Tray
y Transport Assembly
3 Remove the screws and remove the Trans~ort
Figure 1 Removing the Transport Assembly
3. (Figure 2): Remove the DSDF Transport Drive Belt.
five
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.22, REP 5.23 Workcentre XD SERIES
Exit Drive Belt 0500050a
Figure 2 Removing the Transport Drive Belt
4. (Figure 3): Remove the DSDF Drive Belt
Drive Motor Bracket Remove the three screws and remove the Drive Motor
NOTE: During reassembly place the Drive Belt as shown
0500051a
Figure 3 Removing the DSDF Drive Belt
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.23
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 5.24 DSDF Pinch Roll Solenoid (SOL2) Parts List on PL 9-4 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5.22).
2. Remove the DSDF Transport Assembly (REP 5.23).
3. (Figure 1): Remove the DSDF Pinch Roll Solenoid (SOL2)
DSDF Pinch Roll Solenoid (SOL2) \
2 Remove the two screws and
1 Disconnect the connector
I remove Pinch Roll Solenoid
Figure 1 Removing the Pinch Roll Solenoid (SOL2)
REP 5.25 DSDF Exit Roller Parts List on PL 9.4 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Card.
1. Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5.22).
2. Remove the DSDF Transport Assembly (REP 5.23).
3. Remove the DSDF Transport Roller (REP 5 26).
4. Remove the DSDF Duplex Transport Roller (REP 5.27).
5. (Figure 1): Remove the Lower Paper Guide.
Lower Paper Guide
1 Remove the two screws and remove the Lower Paper Guide
NOTE: Notice the two mounting positions of the Document Guide
0500061a
Figure 1 Removing the Document Guide
6 . (Figure 2): Remove the Upper Paper Guide
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.24, REP 5.25 Workcentre XD SERIES
Umer P a ~ e r Guide
Remove the two screws and remove the Upper Paper Guide
Figure 2 Removing the Upper Paper Guide
7. (F~gure 3): Remove the DSDF Exit Roller
1 Remove the €-Rings and remove the Hard- ware shown
Remove the DSDF Exit Roller
Figure 3 Removing the DSDF Exit Roller
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.25
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 5.26 DSDF Transport Roller Parts List on Pk 9.4 Rernoval
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. DisconnecMhe Power Cord.
1. Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5 22). 2. Remove the DSDF Transport Assembly (REP 5.23).
3. (Figure 1): Remove the Document Guide.
1 Remove the two screws and remove 4 the Document Guide
Figure 1 Removing the Document Guide
4. (Figure 2): Remove the DSDF Duplex Transport Roller
Guide
Loosen the screw and move the Paper Guide down
Document Guide
Remove the E-Rings and bearings and remove the Duplex Transport Roller
Duplex iransport Roller
Figure 2 Removing the Duplex Transport Roller
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.26 Workcentre XD SERIES
REP 5.27 DSDF Duplex Transport Roller Parts List on PL 9.4 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.
1 Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5 22) 2 Remove the DSDF Transport Assembly (REP 5 23)
3 (F~gure 1) Remove the Document Gu~de.
1 Remove the two screws and remove the Document Guide / i
Figure 1 Removing the Document Guide
4. (Figure 2): Remove the DSDF Transport Roll Clutch (CL1)
1 Remove the E-Rings and bearings and remove the DSDF Transport Roll Clutch
DSDF Transport Roll Clutch (CLI)
Guide
0500058a
Figure 2 Removing the Transport Roll Clutch (CL1)
5. (Figure 3): Remove the DSDF Duplex Gate
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.27
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
2 Remove the Duplex Gate (snaps off)
Duplex Gate
Loosen the screw and move the Document Guidedown 1
Document Guide
Figure 3 Removing the Duplex Transport Roller
6. (Figure 4): Remove the DSDF Duplex Transport Roller
1 Remove the Docu- ment Guide and the Duplex Transport Roller
Document Guide
\ Duplex Transport Roller
0500060a
Figure 4 Removing the Duplex Transport Roller
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.27 Workcentre XD SERIES
REP 5.28 DSDF Duplex Drive Roller Parts List on %a&. 1-4 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Saivitch. Disconnect the Power Cord.
1. Unlatch the TransferIDetact Corotron at each end and remove it.
2 (Figure 1): Remove the inner Paper Guide.
Paper Guide w w
0500034a
Figure 1 Removing the Covers
3. (F~gure 2): Remove the Duplex Dr~ve Roller.
1 Bend the flexible Duplex Drive Roller at the center and remove it
Duplex Drive Roller
Figure 2 Removing the Duplex Drive Roller
WorkCentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.28
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 5.29 DSDF Deflection Gate Solenoid (SOL31 Parts List on PL 9.1A Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Powor Switch. Disconnect tine Power Cord. 1. Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5.22).
2. Remove the DSDF Transport Assembly (REP 5.23).
3. (Figure 1): Remove the Deflection Gate.
NOTE: Notice the position of the Gate Spring (next to the inside frame) before removing it
2 Lift the Deflection Gate up and remove
Remove the retainer clip and slip the bear- ing out of the inside
NOTE: Notice the position of the Deflection Gate mounting on the solenoid before removing it
0500064a
Figure 1 Removing the Document Guide
4. (Figure 2): Remove the DSDF Deflection Gate Solenoid (SOL3)
Deflection Gate Solenoid (SOL3)
05000ffia
Figure 2 Removing the Deflection Gate Solenoid (SOL3)
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.29 Workcentre XD SERIES
REP 5.30 DSDF Exit Drive Motor (MOT5) Parts List on Pk 2.1 Removal
WARNiNG Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the Document Cover/Document Feeder Assembly.
2 ( Figure 1): Remove the Rear Cover and the Access Cover.
1 Remove the four screws , t
Figure 1 Removing the Covers
3. (Flgure 2): Remove the PWB Cover.
Document Cover Closed Sensor (Q9) h \
Main PWB Cov
Remove the six screws and remove the cover
Figure 2 Removing the PWB Cover
4. (Figure 3): Remove the Main PWB.
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.30
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
screws and remove the Main PWB
Figure 3 Removing the Main PWB
all to the
NOTE: Be sure to engage the Exit Drive Motor Gear with the
Remove the two screws, remove 00033 a
the Exit Drive Motor Cover, and Exit Drive Motor (MOT5)
Figure 4 Removing the Exit Drive Motor (MOT5) (Figure 4): Remove the Exit Drive Motor (MOT5).
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.30 Workcentre XD SERIES
REP 5.31 DSDF Clutch (CL1) Parts List on Pb 9.4 Removal
WARMING Switch o f the Main Power Switch. Disconnect t he Power Cord.
1 . Remove the DSDF Feed Assembly (REP 5 22)
2. Remove the DSDF Transport Assembly (REP 5 23)
3. (Figure I) : Remove the Transport Assembly.
NOTE: Observe the posrtion of the clutch engagement
2 Remove the E-R~ng and remove the clutch
1 Remove the two Tie wraps and disconnect the connector
Figure 1 Removing the DSDF Clutch (CL1)
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.36
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 5.31 Workcentre XD SERIES
REP 6.1 Document Glass Assembly Parts List on PL I ,I Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Di~connecf the Power Cord. 1 . Remove the follow~ng:
a. Document Cover Assembly
b. Rear Cover
c. Top R~ght Cover
2 (Figure 1): Remove the Document Glass Assembly
Remove the Document Glass 2 Assembly Remove the Top
Left Cover
1 Remove th screw
Figure 1 Removing the Document Glass Assembly
SKYOOSN
REP 6.2 Exposure Lamp Carriage Parts List on PL 3.1 Removal
WARNING Switch off tho Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord, 1. Remove the following:
a. Document Cover Assembly
b. Rear Cover
c. Top Right Cover
d. Document Glass Assembly (REP 6,l)
2. (Figure 1): Prepare to remove the Exposure Lamp Carriage.
1 Remove the screw and the bracket (Front and ear)
2 Disconnect the carriage from the Scan Cable (Front and Rear)
Figure 1 Preparing to Remove the Exposure Lamp Carriage
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 6.1, REP 6.2
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
CAUTiON Be carefuf not to damage the ribbon cabie. 3. (Figure 2): Remove the Exposure Lamp Carriage
3 Remove the Exposur Lamp Carriage
1 Move the carriage to the frame cutout
Figure 2 Removing the Exposure Lamp Carriage
Replacement After reassembling the machine, perform the following adjustment:
Image Distortion (Horizontal and Vertical) AD$ 6.7.
2 Disconnect the Ribbon Cable
REP 6.3 Scan Drive Motor (MOT21 Parts List on PL 3.1 Removal
WARNING Switckn off the Main Power S~ti tch. Disconnect the ~Ilrbniok cord. 1. Remove the Document Cover Assembly
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
3. Remove the PWB Cover (PL 7 1).
4. (Figure 1): Remove the Scan Dr~ve Motor.
Disconnect the Ribbon Cable
screws
Remove the motor
Figure 1 Removing the Scan Drive Motor
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 6.2, REP 6.3 WorkCentre XD SERIES
REP 6.4 Laser Module Parts List on PL 3.3 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch Disconnect the Power Cord. 1 Remove the follow~ng.
a Document Cover Assembly
b. Rear Cover
c Top R~ght Cover
d. Top Left Cover
e Slde Door
f. Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6 I )
g. Control Console ( REP 14 5)
h. Ma~n PWB ( REP I 7 ) I Optlcs Frame Assembly ( REP 6 6)
j Ex~t Roller ( REP 8 9)
k Manual Ex~t Drrve Belt ( REP 8 10)
2 ( Figure 1) Remove the Laser Module
2 1 Remove the Remove the belt screws (6)
2 Remove the Laser Module
1 Lift the tab and remove the knob
REP 6.5 LensICCD Module Parts List 017 PL 3.2 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord 1 Remove the follow~ng:
a. Document Cover Assembly
b. Rear Cover
c. Top Right Cover
2. Remove the Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6 1).
3. ( Figure I). Remove the LensICCD Module.
1 Remove the screws (4) and . the Lens Cover
4 Remove the module
3 Remove the screws (2)
---. 2 Disconnect the Ribbon Cable
Screw Location (Front) Screw Location
(Rear)
Figure 1 Removing the LensICCD Module
Replacement
1. If the LensICCD Module is being replaced, perform LensICCD Module ( ADJ 6.2).
Figure 1 Removing the Laser Module
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 6.4, REP 6.5
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 6.6 Optics Frame Assembly Parts List on PL 3.1 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.
1. Remove the following:
a. Document Cover Assembly
b. Rear Cover
c. Top Right Cover
d. Top Left Cover
e. Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1)
f. Control Console ( REP 14.5)
g. Main PWB ( REP 1 . I )
2. Remove the three screws from the upper portion of the PWB Mounting Bracket ( PL 7.1).
3. ( Figure 1): Remove the Optics Frame Assembly.
I Remove the five screws from inside the Optics Frame Assembly A
Remove the / Optics Frame Assembly
2 Remove the two screws from out- side the Optics Frame Assembly
Figure 1 Removing the Optics Frame Assembly
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 6.6
REP 8.1 Paper Feed Solenoid (SOL11 Parts List on PL 2 2 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1 Remove the followrng
a Document Cover Assembly
b Rear Cover
c Top R~ght Cover
d Top Left Cover
e S~de Door
f Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6 1)
g. Control Console ( REP 14 5)
h Maln PWB ( REP 1 I )
I Opt~cs Frame Assembly ( REP 6 6)
j Ex~t Roller ( REP 8 9)
k Manual Ex~t Drrve Belt ( REP 8 10)
I Maln Drlve Assembly ( REP 8 12)
2 ( Figure I). Remove the Paper Feed Solenold
2 Remove the belt
2 Remove the solenoid
d Remove screw
l'.p+@
Figure 1 Removing the Paper Feed Solenoid
1 Lift the tab and remove the knob
REP 8.2 Registration Roll Solenoid (SOL31 Parts List on Pk 2.2 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch, Disconnect t he Power Card. 1. Remove the following:
a. Document Cover Assembly
b. Rear Cover
c. Top Right Cover
d. Top Left Cover
e. Side Door
f. Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1)
g. Control Console ( REP 14.5)
h. Main PWB ( REP 1.1)
i. Optics Frame Assembly ( REP 6.6)
j. Exit Roller ( REP 8.9)
k. Manual Exit Drive Belt ( REP 8.10)
I. Main Drive Assembly ( REP 8.12)
2. ( Figure 1): Remove the Registration Roll Solenoid.
2 2 Remove the Remove the belt solenoid
1 Remove screw
Lift the tab and remove the
Figure 1 Removing the Registration Roll Solenoid
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.1, REP 8.2
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 8.3 Paper Feed Sensor (Q1) Parts List on PL 5-73 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Swiich. Disconnect the Power Card. 1. Remove the following:
a. Document Cover Assembly
b. Rear Cover
c. Top Right Cover
d. Side Door
e. Fuser Assembly (REP 10 1)
2. (Figure 1): Remove the Upper Front Paper Guide.
"I Remove the-----,.-. , screws (3)
2 Remove the guide
Figure 1 Removing the Upper Front Paper Guide
3. ( Figure 2): Remove the Paper Feed Sensor
Figure 2 Removing the Paper Feed Sensor
Repairs and Adjustments 4/00
REP 8.3 4-56 Workcentre XD SERlES
REP 8.4 Bypass Feed Sensor (Q2) (XD100KD102) Parts List on PBb 5 2 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the follow~ng,
a. Toner Cartr~dge
b Drum Cartrrdge
c Remove the Document Cover/Document Feeder Assembly from the h~nge hous~ngs and place ~t on top of the mach~ne
d. Rear Cover
e. Top Rrght Cover
f S~de Door
g Fuser Assembly
h Ma~n Dr~ve Assembly Harness Gu~de
2 ( F~gure 1) Remove the Upper Cover
1 Remove the screw
4 Remove the cover
Hidden tab
3 insert a screw- driver here and gently pry to release the hid- den tab.
Figure 1 Removing the Upper Cover
3. ( Figure 2): Remove the Bypass Feed Sensor.
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.4
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
1 Release the +..h,.
2 Remove the sensor
Figure 2 Removing the Bypass Feed Sensor
REP 8.5 Tray Detect Switch Harness Parts List on PL 5.1 Removal
WARNING Switch off %he Main Power Switch. Dlsccsnnlact the Power Cord.
1. Remove the following:
a. Document Cover Assembly
b. Rear Cover
c. Top Right Cover
d. Top Left Cover
e. Side Door
f. Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.9)
g. Control Console ( REP 14.5)
h. Main PWB ( REP 1.1)
i. Optics Frame Assembly ( REP 6.6)
j. Laser Module ( REP 6.4)
k. Main Drive Assembly ( REP 8.12)
2. ( Figure 1): Remove the Intermediate Frame Assembly.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.4, REP 8.5 Workcentre XB SERIES
2 4 Remove the assembly
Remove the two screws and the Fuser Connector
Figure 1 Removing the Intermediate Frame Assembly
3. ( Figure 2): Remove the Upper Front Paper Guide.
3 p Disconnect the connectors and the ground wire
Figure 2 Removing the Upper Front Paper Guide
4. ( Figure 3): Remove the Tray Detect Switch Harness.
3 Remove the harness from
Figure 3 Removing the Tray Detect Switch Harness
2 Remove the guide
1 Release the tabs
Workcentre XD SERIES Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.5
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 8.6 Paper Feed Roller Parts List on PL 5,l Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect %he Power Cord. 1. Remove the Paper Tray.
2. ( Figure 1): Remove the Paper Feed Roller.
2 Remove the
Raise the side of the copier and remove the E-ring and the roller
REP 8.7 Transport Roller (XD1 OOMD1Q2) Parts List on PL 5.2 Removal
WARNING Switrtr off the Main Power Switch, Disconnect the Power Cord.
1. Remove the following:
a. Toner Cartridge
b. Drum Cartridge
c. Remove the Document Cover/Document Feeder Assembly from the hinge housings and place it on top of the machine.
d. Rear Cover
e. Top Right Cover
f. Side Door
g. Fuser Assembly
h. Main Drive Assembly Harness Guide
2. ( Figure 1): Remove the Upper Cover.
Figure 1 Removing the Paper Feed Roller
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.6, REP 8.7 Workcentre XD SERIES
1 Remove the screw
Figure 1 Removing the Upper Cover
3. ( Figure 2) . Remove the Bypass Frame.
1 Remove the screws (3)
3 Remove frame
the
2 Disconnect the ground wire
Figure 2 Removing the Bypass Frame
SKY045N 4. ( Figure 3): Turn over the Bypass Frame and remove the Transport Roller.
WorkCentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.7
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
3 Remove the components
1 Remove the E-ring and move the bearing
REP 8.8 Side Door interlock Switch (S3IS4) Parts List on PL 5.3, PL 5.4 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Maira Power Switckr. Disconnect t he Power Cord.
1. Remove the following:
a Toner Cartridge
b Drum Cartridge
c. Remove the Document Cover/Document Feeder Assembly from the hlnge housings and place ~t on top of the machlne
d Rear Cover
e Top Right Cover
f S~de Door
g Fuser Assembly
h Maln Dr~ve Assembly Harness Gu~de
NOTE: Although the Upper Covers on the XDlOO and the XD102 are not ldentlcal to the Upper Cover on the XD104, th~s procedure may be used to remove the similar components.
2 ( Figure 4) Remove the bypass Upper Cover
2 Remove roller
Figure 3 Removing the Transport Roller
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.7, REP 8.8 Workcentre XD SERIES
1 Remove the screw
2 Remove the
den tab. ,
Figure 1 Removing the Upper Cover
3. ( F~gure 2) Remove the S~de Door Interlock Switch
~ e m o v e the screw
Figure 2 Removing the Side Door Interlock Switch
Workcentre XD SERlES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.8
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 8.9 Exit Roller Parts List on PL 2.1 Removal
WARNI1NG Switch off the Main Power Switch. Discon~nect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the following:
a. Document Cover Assembly
b. Rear Cover
c. Top Right Cover
d. Top Left Cover
e. Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1)
f. Control Console ( REP 14.5)
g. Main PWB ( REP 1 . I )
h. Optics Frame Assembly ( REP 6.6)
2. ( Figure 1): Open the Exit Guide.
1 Disconnect springs
Exit
Figure 1 Opening the Exit Guide
3. ( Figure 2): Remove the Exit Roller.
3
1 Release the tab and remove the pulley
Lift the Exit Roller straight up, being care- ful not to break the mounting holders
Figure 2 Removing the Exit Roller
Repairs and Adjustments 4/00 REP 8.9 4-64 Workcentre XD SERIES
REP 8.10 Manual Exit Drive Belt Parts List on PL 2,l Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Povgea Switch Disconnect the Power Cord.
1 Remove the following
a Document Cover Assembly
b Rear Cover
c Top Rlght Cover
d Top Left Cover
e Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6 1)
f Control Console ( REP 14 5)
g Ma~n PWB ( REP 4 2 )
h Optlcs Frame Assembly ( REP 6 6)
I Exlt Roller ( REP 8 9)
2 ( Figure 1). Remove the Manual Exlt Dr~ve Belt
L
Remove belt
the-
Lift the tab and remove the knob
Figure 1 Removing the Manual Exit Drive Belt
REP 8.1 1 Lower Transport Roller Parts List on PL 2.1 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.
1. Remove the following:
a. Document Cover Assembly
b. Rear Cover
c. Top Right Cover
d. Top Left Cover
e. Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1)
f. Control Console ( REP 14.5)
g. Main PWB ( REP 1.1) h. Optics Frame Assembly ( REP 6.6)
i. Exit Roller ( REP 8.9)
j. Manual Exit Drive Belt ( REP 8.10)
2. ( Figure 1): Prepare to remove the roller.
1 Lift the tab and move the pulley
1 Lift the tab and remove the knob
I / I
Lift the tab and 'move the pulley
1
J SKY034N
Figure 1 Preparing to Remove the Roller
3. ( Figure 2): Remove the Lower Transport Roller.
4/00 Repairs and Adjustments
Workcentre XD SERlES 4-65 REP 8.1 0, REP 8.1 1
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 8.1 2 Main Drive Assembly
2 Remove the belt
Parts List on PL 2-1 Removal
WARMING Switch ON the Main Pavves Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.
1 1. Remove the following:
Remove the a. Document Cover Assembly roller b. Rear Cover
c. Top Right Cover
d. Top Left Cover
1 e. Side Door
Lift the tab and f. Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6 I ) remove the g. Control Console ( REP 14.5) knob h. Main PWB ( REP 2.1)
i. Optics Frame Assembly ( REP 6.6)
S K Y O ~ ~ N j. Exit Roller ( REP 8 9) k. Manual Exit Drive Belt ( REP 8.10)
2. ( Figure I): Remove the Harness Guide. Figure 2 Removing the Lower Transport Roller
2 1 Remove the
1 L~ft the tab and remove the knob
Figure 1 Removing the Harness Guide
3. ( Ftgure 2) Remove the Maln Drlve Assembly and the Ex~t Drlve Belt.
Repairs and Adjustments 4/00
REP 8.1 1, REP 8.1 2 4-66 Workcentre XD SERIES
2 1 Disconnect the
Remove the groun belt
Remove the
4 Remove the belt
screws (5)
Lift the tab and remove the knob
Remove the assembly, being careful to hold the gears in place
Figure 2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly
REP 8.13 Lower Registration Roller Parts List on Pb 5.1 Removal
WARNING Switch obi; the Main Power Switch. Disconnect t he Power Cord.
1. Remove the following:
a. Document Cover Assembly
b. Rear Cover
c. Top Right Cover
d. Top Left Cover
e. Side Door
f. Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1)
g. Control Console ( REP 24.5)
h. Main PWB ( REP 1.1)
i . Optics Frame Assembly ( REP 6.6)
j. Laser Module ( REP 6.4) SKY037N
k. Main Drive Assembly ( REP 8,12)
2. ( Figure 1): Remove the Intermediate Frame Assembly.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.12, REP 8.113
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
2 4 Remove the assembly
3 Disconnect the connectors and the ground wire
Remove the two screws and the Fuser Connector
Figure 1 Removing the Intermediate Frame Assembly
3. ( Figure 2): Remove the Upper Front Paper Guide.
1 Remove the screws (3)
2 Remove the guide
Figure 2 Removing the Upper Front Paper Guide
4. ( Figure 3): Remove the Lower Registration Roller.
Repairs and Adjustments 4/00 REP 8.13 4-68 Workcentre XD SERIES
Remove the roller
2 Movethe bearing \ .--
1 Remove the
-screw, ground plate, a i d E-ring
Figure 3 Removing the Lower Registration Roller
REP 8.14 Tray Detect Switch (S2) Parts List on Pk 5.1 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Card.
1. Remove the following:
a. Document Cover Assembly
b. Rear Cover
c. Top Right Cover
d. Top Left Cover
e. Side Door
f. Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1)
g. Control Console ( REP 14.5)
h. Main PWB ( REP I . I ) i. Optics Frame Assembly ( REP 6.6)
j. Laser Module ( REP 6.4)
k. Main Drive Assembly ( REP 8.7 2) 2. ( Figure 1): Remove the Intermediate Frame Assembly.
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.13, REP 8.14
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
3 Disconnect the connectors and the ground wire
Remove the two screws and the Fuser Connector
I Remove th screws (3)
Figure 2 Removing the Upper Front Paper Guide
4. ( Figure 3): Remove the Tray Detect Switch
Figure 1 Removing the Intermediate Frame Assembly
3. ( Figure 2): Remove the Upper Front Paper Guide.
Figure 3 Removing the Tray Detect Switch
2 Remove the guide
1 Release the tabs
SKYOSON
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.14 Workcentre XD SERIES
REP 8.15 Feed Roll (XDlO4) Parts List on Pk 5.5 Removal
WARNING S w k h off the Main Power Smsit@h. Di~c6inkiect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the following:
a. Toner Cartridge
b. Drum Cartridge
c. Remove the Document Cover/Document Feeder Assembly from the hinge housings and place it on top of the machine.
d. Rear Cover
e. Top Right Cover
f. Side Door
g. Fuser Assembly
h. Main Drive Assembly Harness Guide
2. ( Figure 1): Remove the Upper Cover.
I Remove the screw
4 Remove the cover
Hldden tab
3 insert a small screwdriver here and gently pry to release the hid- den tab. 1 1 I -
2 Release tabs
the
Figure 1 Removing the Upper Cover
3. ( Figure 2): Remove the Bypass Frame.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.15
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
1 Remove the screws (3)
3 Remove the frame
2 Disconnect the ground wire
3 Remove the assembly
Remove the screws
2 Disengage the shaft
Figure 2 Removing the Bypass Frame
4. ( Figure 3): Remove the Feed Roll and Shaft Assembly
Figure 3 Removing the Feed Roll and Shaft Assembly
5. ( Figure 4): Remove the Feed Roll.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.15 Workcentre XD SERIES
3 2 Remove the Remove the
Feed Roll shaft
Figure 4 Removing the Feed Roll
Replacement 1. Re~nstall the Feed Roller w~th the label or~ented as shown In ( Figure 4)
REP 8.1 5 Retard Roll (XDI 04) Parts List on PL 5.5 Removal
WARNliNG Switch off the Main Power Switch, Disconnect the Power Cord.
1. Remove the following:
a. Toner Cartridge
b. Drum Cartridge
c. Remove the Document Cover/Document Feeder Assembly from the hinge housings and place it on top of the machine.
d. Rear Cover
e. Top Right Cover
f. Side Door
g. Fuser Assembly
h. Main Drive Assembly Harness Guide
2. ( Figure 1): Remove the Upper Cover.
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.15, REP 8.66
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
1 Remove the screw
Insert a small screwdr~ver her
the
release the hid- den tab.
Figure 1 Removing the Upper Cover
3. ( Figure 2): Remove the Bypass Frame.
1 Remove the screws (3)
3 Remove the frame
2 Disconnect the .,."
ground wire
Figure 2 Removing the Bypass Frame
4. ( Figure 3): Remove the Feed Roll and Shaft Assembly
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.16 Workcentre XD SERIES
3 Remove the assembly \
2 Disengage the shaft -
1 Remove the screws (2)
Figure 3 Removing the Feed Roll and Shaft Assembly
5. ( Figure 4): Remove the Retard Roll.
Retard Roll
Figure 4 Removing the Retard Roll
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.16
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 8.17 Feed Solenoid (XD104) Parts List on PL 5.5 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the following:
a. Toner Cartridge
b. Drum Cartridge
c. Remove the Document Cover/Document Feeder Assembly from the hinge housings and place it on top of the machine.
d. Rear Cover
e. Top Right Cover
f. Side Door
g. Fuser Assembly
h. Main Drive Assembly Harness Guide 2. ( Figure 1): Remove the Upper Cover,
1 Remove the screw
Insert a smail screwdriver her
release the h~d- den tab.
Figure 1 Removing the Upper Cover
3. ( Figure 2): Remove the Bypass Frame.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.17 Workcentre XD SERIES
1 Remove the screws (3)
3 Remove the frame
Figure 2 Removing the Bypass Frame
4. ( Figure 3): Remove the Feed Roll and Shaft Assembly
2 Disconnect the ground wire
3 Remove the assembly
Remove the
2 Disengage the shaft
Figure 3 Removing the Feed Roll and Shaft Assembly
5 . ( Figure 4): Remove the Feed Solenoid.
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
1 Cut the cable tie
3 Remove the solenoid
2 Remove the screw
Figure 4 Removing the Feed Solenoid
REP 8.20 Tray 2 Paper Feed Sensor (Q7) Parts List on PL 5.8 Removal
WARMING Switch off the? Main Power Switch. Dtsconnecl the Power Cord. 1. ( Figure 1): Remove the Rear Cover.
1 Remove the screw and remove the Rear Cov
NOTE: Engage the Latch when reinstalling the Rear Cover
Figure 1 Removing the Rear Cover
2. ( Figure 2): Remove the Tray 2 Drive Assembly.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.17, REP 8.28
NOTE: When reinstalling Tray 2 Drive Assemblx make sure rt is mounted on the locator posts
i?. Remove the screw and disconnect the ground wire
1 Open the Lower Remove the Side Door screws (2)
Lower the drive arm gear and remove the Drive Assembly
Figure 2 Removing the Drive Assembly
3. ( Figure 3): Remove the Tray 2 Paper Feed Sensor ((27).
Release the pawls and remove the sensor
0500018A- SKY
Figure 3 Removing the Paper Feed Sensor (Q7)
4/00 Repairs and Adjustments
Workcentre XD SERIES 4-79 REP 8.28
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 8.21 Tray 2 Detect Switch (S5) Parts List on PL 5.8 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Diocorrnecl the Power Cord. 1. ( F~gure f ): Remove the Rear Cover.
1 Remove the screw and remove the Rear Cov
NOTE: Engage the Latch when reinstalling the Rear Cover
Figure 1 Removing the Rear Cover
2. ( Figure 2): Remove the Tray 2 Drive Assembly.
NOTE: When reinstalling Tray 2 Drive Assembly, make sure it is mounted on the locator posts
2 /Remove the screw and disconnect the ground wlre
Remove the screws (2)
0500016A-SKY
Lower the drlve arm gear and remove the Drlve Assembly
0500017A-SKY
Figure 2 Removing the Drive Assembly
3. ( Figure 3): Remove the Detect Switch (S5).
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.21 Workcentre XD SERIES
1 Release the tabs and remove the Detect Switch (S5)
connector
REP 8.22 Tray 2 Paper Feed Solenoid (SOL21 Parts List on Pig 5.8 Removal
WARNING Swltch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. ( Figure 1): Remove the Rear Cover.
1 Remove the screw and remove the Rear Cover
NOTE: Engage the Latch when reinstalling the Rear Cover
Figure 1 Removing the Rear Cover
05000r9A-SKy 2. ( Figure 2): Remove the Tray 2 Drive Assembly.
Figure 3 Removing the Detect Switch (S5)
WorkCentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.21, REP 8.22
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
NOTE: When reinstalling Tray 2 Drive Assembly, make sure it is mounted on the locator posts
R
L
Remove the screw and d~sconnect the ground wire
1 0 Sl
Remove the screws (2)
Lower the drive arm gear and remove the Drive Assembly
Figure 2 Removing the Drive Assembly
3. ( Figure 3): Remove the Paper Feed Solenoid (SOL2)
Solenoid
0500020A-SKY
Figure 3 Removing the Paper Feed Solenoid (SOL21
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.22 Workcentre XD SERIES
REP 8.23 Tray 2 Transport Roller Parts List on PL 5.8 Removal
WARNING Switch off the blain Pcrcver Switch. Diseona-rect the Power Cord
1. ( Figure I ) : Remove the Rear Cover
1 Remove the screw and remove the Rear Cover
NOTE: Engage the Latch when reinstalling the Rear Cover
Figure 1 Removing the Rear Cover
2. ( Figure 2): Remove the Tray 2 Dr~ve Assembly.
NOTE: When reinstalling Tray 2 Drive Assembly, make sure it is mounted on the locator posts
L
Remove the screw and
Side Door screws (2)
4 Lower the drive arm gear and remove the Drive Assembly
Figure 2 Removing the Drive Assembly
3. ( Figure 3): Remove the Transport Roller.
4/00 Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES 4-83 REP 8.23
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
1 1 Remove the E-ring
NOTE: Ensure the ground spring is Remove the E-ring and in contact with the bearing when rein- bearing and remove the stalling the bearing Transport Roller
050002lA-SKY
Figure 3 Removing the Transport Roller
REP 8.24 Tray 2 Paper Feed Clutch Parts List on PL 5.8 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Powe8 Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord
1. ( Frgure 1): Remove the Rear Cover.
1 Remove the screw and remove the Rear Cov
NQTE: Engage the Latch when reinstalling the Rear Cover
Figure 1 Removing the Rear Cover
( Figure 2): Remove the Tray 2 Drive Assembly.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.23, REP 8.24
NOTE: When reinstalling Tray 2 Drive Assembly, make sure it is mounted on the locator posts
1 Open the Lower Side Door
4 / Lower the drive arm gear and remove the Drive Assembly
Figure 2 Removing the Drive Assembly
3. ( Figure 3): Remove the Paper Feed Clutch.
Move the clutch pawl out of the way and remove the clutch
NOTE: Match up the clutch with the flat surface of the Feed Roller Shaft during reinstallation
1 Remove the E-ring
NOTE: Notice the position of each end of the spring before clutch disassembly
Figure 3 Removing the Paper Feed Clutch
Workcentre XD SERIES Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.24
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 8.25 Tray 2 Feed Roller Parts List on PL 5.8 Removal
WARNlNG Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconasect tho Power Cord.
1. ( Figure 1): Remove the Rear Cover.
1 Remove the screw and remove the Rear Cover
Rear Cover
NOTE: Engage the Latch when reinstalling the Rear Cover
Figure 1 Removing the Rear Cover
2. ( Figure 2): Remove the Tray 2 Drive Assembly.
NOTE: When reinstalling Tray 2 Drive Assembly, make sure it is mounted on the locator posts
2 Remove the screw and disconnect the ground wire
Remove the screws (2)
0500016A-SKY
Lower the drive arm gear and remove the Dr~ve Assembly
0500017A-SKY
Figure 2 Removing the Drive Assembly
3. Remove the Tray 2 Clutch ( REP 8.24).
4. ( Figure 3): Remove the Tray 2 Feed Roller
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.25
Notes:
Remove the E-ring Disconnect the spring
to the arm and remove / / this unit
/ 2 Remove the E-ring
NOTE: Ensure the ground spring is in contact with the bearing when reinstalling the bearing
Feed
Figure 3 Removing the Feed Roller
4/00 Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERlES 4-87 REP 8.25,
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.25,
REP 9.1 Toner Motor (MOT41 Parts List on PL 2.1 Removal
WARMING Switch off the Main Power Switch Disconnect the Power Cord 1. Remove the Document Cover Assembly.
2. Remove the Rear Cover
3. Remove the Maln PWB ( REP 1 I ) 4. ( F~guro I ) : Remove the Toner Motor.
1 Disconnect the harness
screws
Figure 1 Removing the Toner Motor
REP 9.2 Transder/Detack Gorotron Assembly Parts List on PL 1.4, PL 7.3 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Pocves Cord. 1. Open the Side Door.
2. ( Figure 1): Remove the TransferIDetack Corotron Assembly.
2 Release the lock- ing pawl
3 Remove the assembly
1 Release the lock- ing pawl
SKYOOZN
Figure 1 Removing the TransferIBetack Corotron Assembly
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 9.1, REP 9.2
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Repairs and Adjustments 4/00
4-90 Workcentre XD SERIES
REP "%.I Fuser Assembly Parts List on PL 6.1 Removal
WARNING Switch off the hlatla Power S w k b ODessonneci the Power Cord, Allow t he Fuser to cool before performing the procedure 1. Remove the Document Cover Assembly.
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
3. Open the S~de Door
4 ( Figure 1): Remove the Fuser Assembly.
Disconnect the connectors (3)
,-' Remove the two screws and the
Figure 1 Removing the Fuser Assembly
REP 10.2 Heat Roil Parts List on PL 6.1 Removal
WARNING Swtch off the Vlaia7 Power Switch Drecorrs*cb the Paever Cord A1Bo'ir*i the Fu-er to cool before perforrnrng the procedure I Remove the Document Cover Assembly
2 Remove the Rear Cover
3 Remove the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10 1) 4 Remove the Paper Gu~de ( REP 15 10)
NOTE: Cut cable ties as necessary.
5. ( Figure 1): Remove the End Covers and open the assembly.
4 Remove the screw
Remove the %,
LeftEnd -----1 Cover
Remove the screws (2)
3 Remove the Right End Cover
Figure 1 Removing the End Covers
6. Remove the Heat Rod ( REP 10.8). 7. ( Figure 2): Remove the Heat Roll.
WorkCentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 10.1, REP 10.2
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
2 Remove the Heat Roll
1
Remove the d retaining ring, Remove the / gear, and retaining ring bearing and bearing
Figure 2 Removing the Heat Roll
REP 410.3 Pressure Roll Parts List on PL 6-2 Removal
WARNING Switch off the blain Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. Alisw t he Fueer to coo8 before performing the proced~rre. 1 Remove the Document Cover Assembly
2 Remove the Rear Cover.
3 Remove the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10 1)
4. Remove the Paper Guide ( REP 10 10)
NOTE: Cut cable ties as necessary.
5. ( Figure I ) : Remove the Right End Cover and open the assembly.
1 Remove the screws (2)
n 3 Remove the Right End Cover
2 Remove the screw
SKY017N
Figure 1 Removing the Right End Cover
6. (Figure 2): Remove the Pressure Roll Arms.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 10.2, REP 10.3
1 Pull the Pressure Roll out of the bearings and remove it along with the washers
Figure 2 Removing the Pressure Roll Arms
7. ( Figure 3): Remove the Pressure Roll.
Figure 3 Removing the Pressure Roll
4/00 Repairs and Adjustments Workcentre XD SERIES 4-93 REP 10.3
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 10.4 Thermistor (RT1) Parts List on PL 6.1 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch, Disconnect the Power Cord. Allow the Fusea to cool before performing the procedure
1. Remove the Document Cover Assembly.
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
3. Remove the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10.1).
NOTE: Cut cable ties as necessary
4. ( F~gure I ) : Remove the Thermistor.
2 Remove the screw and the thermistor
Figure 1 Removing the Thermistor
1 Disconnect the thermistor wires from the Fuser Assembly (cut the cable tie)
REP 10.5 Fuser Jam Sensor (63) Parts List on PL 6.1 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Powgor Switch. Dssconnect the Power Cord. Atlow the Fuser to cool bebore per forming the procedure.
1. Remove the Document Cover Assembly.
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
3. Remove the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10 I) .
4. Remove the Paper Gu~de ( REP 10 10).
NOTE: Cut cable ties as necessary.
5. ( Figure 1): Remove the Right End Cover.
1 Remove the screws (2) 3
Remove the Right End Cover
2 Remove the screw
SKY017N
Figure 1 Removing the Right End Cover
6. ( Figure 2): Remove the Fuser Jam Sensor.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 10.4, REP 10.5 Workcentre XD SERIES
1 Remove the screw \
2 Remove the sensor
Figure 2 Removing the Fuser Jam Sensor
REP 10.6 Ventilation Fan (MOT 3) Parts List on PL 2.1 Removal
WARNBNG Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the Document Cover Assembly.
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
3. Remove the six screws and the PWB Cover ( PL 7.1).
4. ( Figure 1): Remove the Ventilation Fan.
1 Disconnect the connector
2 U Remove the screws (2)
SKY063N
Figure 1 Removing the Ventilation Fan
4/00 Repairs and Adjustments
Workcentre XD SERIES 4-95 REP 10.5, REP 10.6
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 10.7 Exit Sensor (Q4) Parts List on PL 6.3 Removal
WARNiNG Switch off the Main Power SwikCh. Disconnect the Power Cord.
1. Remove the following:
a. Document Cover Assembly
b. Rear Cover
c. Top Right Cover
d. Top Left Cover
e. Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1)
f. Control Console ( REP 14.5)
g. Main PWB ( REP 1.1)
h. Optics Frame Assembly ( REP 6.6)
2. ( Figure 1 ) : Remove the Exit Sensor.
1 Remove the - plastic shield
/
2 Release the tabs and
/ \ \ remove the sensor
REP 10.8 Meat Rod Parts List on PL 6,id Removal
WARNHNG Switch off t he Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. Allow t he h K s e k to coon before pedorming the procedure. 1. Remove the Document Cover Assembly
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
3. Remove the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10 1).
4. Remove the Paper Gulde ( REP 10 10).
NOTE: Cut cable ties as necessary.
5. ( Figure 1): Remove the Right End Cover.
Remove the screws (2) 3
Remove the Right End Cover
2 Remove the screw
Figure 1 Removing the Right End Cover
Wear gioves or wrap a sheet of paper around the Neal faad when handltng it Do not touch the glass secbon of We Heal Rod Oil from fingers can cause damage to the rod If you fouch the Neal Rod, clean the rod wth him Remover on a iinl-free cloth 6. (Ftgure 2) Remove the Heat Rod
Figure 1 Removing the Exit Sensor
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 10.7, REP 10.8 Workcentre XD SERIES
1 Pull the spring and remove the Heat Rod
Figure 2 Removing the Heat Rod
REP 10.9 Thermostat Parts List on PL 6.1 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. Allow the Fuser to cool before performing the procedure. 1. Remove the Document Cover Assembly.
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
3. Remove the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10.1).
4. Remove the Paper Guide ( REP 10.10).
5. Remove the Heat Roll ( REP 10.2).
6. ( Figure 1): Remove the Thermostat.
1 Remove the screws
2 Remove the Heat Rod Spring
3 Remove th Thermosta
Figure 1 Removing the Thermostat
4/00 Repairs and Adjustments
Workcentre XD SERIES 4-97 REP 10.8, REP 10.9
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
REP 10.10 Paper Guide Parts List on PL 6.1 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. Allow the Fuser to coo/ before performing the procedure. 1. Remove the Document Cover Assembly.
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
3. Remove the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10.1).
4. ( Figure 1): Remove the Paper Guide.
1 2 Remove the Remove the Paper screw Guide
SKY0 1 6N
Figure 1 Removing the Paper Guide
REP 10.1 1 Stripper Fingers Parts List on PL 6.1 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Pilatve~ Cord. Allow tho Fusaa to coo9 before performing the procedure. 1 Remove the Document Cover Assembly.
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
3. Remove the Fuser Assembly ( REP 30 1)
4. Remove the Paper Gu~de ( REP 10 10)
NOTE: Cut cable ties as necessary.
5. ( Figure 1): Remove the Right End Cover and open the assembly.
I Remove the screws (2) 3
Remove the Right End Cover
2 Remove the screw
SKY017N
Figure 1 Removing the Right End Cover
6. (Figure 2): Remove the Stripper Fingers.
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 10.10, REP 10.1 1 Workcentre XD SERIES
2 Rotate the Stripper Finger out of the hole
1 Disconnect spring
Figure 2 Removing the Stripper Fingers
REP 10.1 2 Fuser Gate Parts List on PL 6.2 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord. Allow The Fuseir ta cool before performing the procedure. 1. Remove the Document Cover Assembly.
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
3. Remove the Fuser Assembly ( REP 10.1).
4. Remove the Paper Guide ( REP 10.10).
NOTE: Cut cable ties as necessary
5 . ( Figure 1): Remove the Right End Cover.
1 Remove the screws (2)
n 3 Remove the Right End Cover
2 Remove the screw
SKY017N
Figure 1 Removing the Right End Cover
6. (Figure 2): Remove the Fuser Gate
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 10.11, REP 10.12
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Remove the E-ring
Figure 2 Removing the Fuser Gate
Repairs and Adjustments 4/00
REP 10.12 4-1 00 Workcentre XD SERIES
REP 14.5 Control Console Parts List on PL 1,1 Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect the Power Cord.
1. Raise the Document Cover Assembly and open the Front Door CAUTION
Take care not I s damage fire ribbon cable and the harness connected to the Control Consoie PWB.
2 ( Figure I): Remove the Control Console
Carefully remove the 4
Control Console by Disconnect the
rotating the top out harness connector
and downward i
Remove the screws.
\ \
1 Remove the screws
REP 14.7 Output Tray Parts List on PL 1 .I Removal
WARNING Switch off the Main Power Switch. Disconnect t he Pvfler Cord.
1. Remove the following:
a. PaperTray(Pt4.1)
b. Document Cover Assembly
c. Rear Cover
d. Top Left Cover
2. Remove the screw located on the left side of the Output Tray.
3. Pry the tray away from the Main Power Switch using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
4. Release the locking tab which is located in the front left corner of the Output Tray.
5. (Viewed from the Top) Remove the Output Tray by rotating it counterclockwise.
Figure 1 Removing the Control Console
,, Inn Repairs and Adjustments
Workcentre XD SERIES
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Notes:
Repairs and Adjustments 4/00
4-1 02 Workcentre XD SERIES
ADJ 5.1 SDFIDSDF Skew Purpose The purpose IS to correct a 1 to 2mm skew that IS caused by mlsallgnment of the SDF Assem- bly or the DSDF Assembly relatlve to the body of the cop~erlpr~nter.
Check 1 Make a 100% copy of the test pattern 82E12130 on the SDF or DSDF
2 Carefully allgn the lead edge of the test pattern 82E12130 w~th the reglstrat~on gu~de and make a 100% copy on the Document Glass
3 Compare the coples
a If skew IS present and IS the same on both coples, go to the Sectlon 3 Image Quailly Spec!licat~ans
b If a 1 to 2mm skew IS present only on the copy made on the SDF or DSDF, perform the adjustment below
Adjustment 1 (Figure 1) Open the SDFIDSDF Assembly and locate the two screws that secure the
assembly to the r~ght hlnge
locations
Figure 1 Adjusting SDFIDSDF skew
2. Loosen the screws and move the SDFIDSDF Assembly lmm toward the front or rear of the machlne to remove the skew.
3. Tighten the screws.
4. Run a copy from the SDFIDSDF to verify that the skew problem is corrected. If the prob- lem is not corrected, repeat the adjustment procedure.
WorkCentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
ADJ 5.6
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
ADJ 6.1 Copy Density (Exposure) Purpose The purpose is to set the exposure level so that the correct density is produced.
Check 1. Clean the Optics and the Document Glass.
2. Set the magnification to 100%.
3. Set the Exposure to the Text mode.
4. Make five copies of Side A of the standard test pattern.
5. ( Figure 1): Check the fifth copy.
a. If the .20B line pair is just visible and the . I0 line pair is not visible, the exposure is correct.
b. If the .20B line pair is not visible, decrease the exposure.
c. If the .10 line pair is visible, increase the exposure.
.- *-, 111 !?% ::p':; .m
~ @ 1 [ 1 ' ' ' &,
:,",","- : Ill ze :F:"m;: n
-. ::;; : l l t = :::-:: = 1@jl= = - =.
-%.. - --=--=- , ^ _ a _ =
Z%y: ill =:;:z: -m .m L:%y 2 ill = :::?:;! 'Irp^l n -7zd * , Ill =,:=nT-=i E a/,,, = ~ E S - - II! ;FnrriCI
, &*< s : ,c a,:"
::zy a; Ill = r::::: - gs Fiogr, I 7 ,,,,, ., IIt =r::IIl::;:
SKY20 1 N
Figure 1 Checking the Exposure on the Copy
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the Auto mode.
7. Set the Exposure to the Photo mode.
8. Make five copies of Side A of the standard test pattern.
9. Check the fifth copy.
a. If the ,208 line pair is just visible and the .10 line pair is not visible, the exposure is correct.
b. If the .20B line pair is not visible, decrease the exposure.
c. If the .10 line pair is visible, increase the exposure.
10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 for the Toner Saver mode.
Adjustment 1. Enter Diagnostic Code 46-1 and adjust the mode(s) identified in the check as requiring
adjustment.
2. Adjust the Text mode.
a. Select Text.
b. Place the Test Pattern as described in the check.
c. Press the Start button.
A copy is made.
d. Decrease the number to increase the exposure (copy becomes lighter) and press the Start button.
Evaluate the copy per the check and adjust as required.
e. lncrease the number to decrease the exposure (copy becomes darker) and press the Start button. * Evaluate the copy per the check and adjust as required.
3. Adjust the Auto mode.
a. Select Auto.
b. Place the Test Pattern as described in the check.
c. Press the Start button.
A copy is made.
d. Decrease the number to increase the exposure (copy becomes lighter) and press the Start button.
Evaluate the copy per the check and adjust as required.
e. lncrease the number to decrease the exposure (copy becomes darker) and press the Start button.
Evaluate the copy per the check and adjust as required.
4. Adjust the Photo mode.
a. Select Photo.
b. Place the Test Pattern as described in the check.
c. Press the Start button.
A copy is made.
d. Decrease the number to increase the exposure (copy becomes lighter) and press the Start button.
Evaluate the copy per the check and adjust as required.
e. lncrease the number to decrease the exposure (copy becomes darker) and press the Start button.
Evaluate the copy per the check and adjust as required.
5. Adjust the Toner Saver mode.
a. Select Toner Saver.
b. Place the Test Pattern as described in the check.
Repairs and Adjustments
ADJ 6.1 Workcentre XD SERIES
c. Press the Start button ADJ 6.2 LensICCD Module A copy is made. Purpose
d. Decrease the number to increase the exposure (copy becomes lighter) and press the Start button. The purpose is to position the LensJCCD Module at the factory-specified setting
Evaluate the copy per the check and adjust as required. Adjustment e. Increase the number to decrease the exposure (copy becomes darker) and press
the Start button. CAUTION
Evaluate the copy per the check and adjust as required. Only the mounliw screws shown below are to be utiiized by the Service Representative. The module is available oniy as an assembly and must not be disassembled
6. Exit Diagnostics. NOTE: Example: Lens Unit Number is -2.8. lnstall the edge of the Lens/CCD Module approxi- mately three 11nes ln the negative dlrecfion from the Reference Line
Example. Lens Unit Number IS 0 Install the edge of the Lens/CCD Module exactly on the Ref- erence Llne
1. (Figure 1): Install the module so that the Lens Adjustment Plate is aligned with the lines on the Base Plate according to the number written on the Lens Adjusting Plate.
Lens Plate
Adjusting
(-) Direction
Reference Line (0)
(+) Direction
Mounting Screws
Figure 1 Adjusting the LensICCD Module
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
ADJ 6.1, ADJ 6.2
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
ADJ 6.7 Image Distortion (Horizontal and Vertica!) Purpose The purpose is to correct image distortion by changing the parallelism of the mirrors (Exposure Lamp Carriage and Half-Rate Carriage).
Check 1. ( F i g u r e 1 ) : Make a Test Pattern for the check and adjustment by drawing a rectangle on a
sheet of 8-112'' X 14" (84) paper. Ensure that the corners are square.
1 m m l 1 "IDE" .- m
-. -" h.
.- r,"9.m7 Ill .. n "iF...,.cl iE elln O, mm -= -
ljisli qcs- h 'TF""=-8 "-=e a = >11* -. - .. =. :::: : Ill Ez ;:gr;: =
[@a[ - =.
7 _ - -- - ^ _.= I
Figure 1 Making the Test Pattern
2. ( F i g u r e 2): Make several copies of the Test Pattern.
a. If the copies look like the Document, the check is good.
b. If the copies look like A or B, perform the Horizontal Image Distortion Adjustment.
Document COPY A
Figure 2 Checking the Copies
Adjustment HORIZONTAL IMAGE DISTORTION
1. Remove the Document Glass Assembly ( REP 6.1).
2. ( Figrrre 3): Loosen the screws on the Exposure Lamp Carriage
Loosen the screws
Figure 3 Loosening the Exposure Lamp Carriage Screws
3. ( Figure 4): Rotate the Scan Drive Gear until the Half-Rate Carriage comes in contact with the Positioning Brackets.
a. If contact is equal on both sides, the adjustment is good.
b. If there is no contact on one side, continue with the adjustment.
Repairs and Adjustments
ADJ 6.7
Half-Rate Carriage
Pos~tlon~ng Posltionlng Bracket
Loosen the setscrews
Scan Cable Hub
Rotate the gear
SKY074F
Figure 5 Loosening the Setscrews on the Scan Cable Hub
5. ( Figure 6): Without moving the Scan Cable Hub Shaft, rotate the Hub until the Half-Rate Carriage makes contact with the Positioning Bracket.
Half-Rate Figure 4 Checking the Contact of the Half-Rate Carriage Carriag
4. ( Figure 5): Loosen the setscrews on the Scan Cable Hub on the side where there was no contact.
2 Tighten the setscrews
"I Rotate the Hu
Figure 6 Aligning the Half-Rate Carriage -
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 untll the parallel~sm of the Half-Rate Carnage IS properly adjusted.
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
ADJ 6.7
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
( Figure 7): With the Half-Rate Carriage against the Positioning Brackets, move the Expo- sure Lamp Carriage into contact with the frame. Hold a straightedge firmly against the frame and ensure that the front and rear tabs are parallel with and do not protrude beyond the frame, then tighten the mounting screws.
2. ( Figure 9): Loosen the mounting screws of the Half-Rate Carriage Rail to set the balance.
Front and rear tabs contact straightedge
1 Loosen screws
3 Tighten the
NOTE: Use a straightedge to ensure that the front and rear tabs are aligned parallel to the frame before tightening the screws.
Tighten the screws
Figure 7 Aligning the Half-Rate Carriage
VERTICAL IMAGE DISTORTION
1. ( Figure 8): Correction is made for Vertical lmage Distortion when the copy of the Test Pattern looks like the following figure. If all corners are well-formed right angles, no further adjustment is required, '
k Change the height of the 1 right side of the rail Correction required to \- balance the Change the height of the distortion left side of the rail
Figure 8 Evaluating the Copies
the
screws \
, rail
Figure 9 Aligning the Half-Rate Carriage Rail
3. Reassemble the Copier and repeat the check.
4. Check lmage Magnification (ADJ 6.8).
Repairs and Adjustments
ADJ 6.7 Workcentre XD SERIES
ADJ 6.8 Image Magnification Purpose The purpose is to provide the correct vertical and horizontal magnification.
Check 1. Make a 100% copy of S~de B of the Standard Test Pattern.
2 The magnlflcat~on of a 100% copy should be w~th~n 1 0% of the or~glnal slze In the vert~cal and hor~zontal d~rect~ons
Adjustment MAGNIFICATION (Front to Rear)
1 Enter D~agnost~c Code 48-1
2. Press the Exposure Mode button until the Text lamp IS Ilt
3 To change the rnagn~flcat~on, press the Copy Quant~ty buttons
a. To increase the magnification, increase the number.
b. To decrease the magnification, decrease the number.
c. Press the Clear button.
MAGNIFICATION (Lead Edge to Trail Edge)
1. Enter Diagnostic Code 48-1.
2. Press the Exposure Mode button until the Photo lamp is lit.
3. To change the magnification, press the Copy Quantity buttons.
a. To increase the magnification, increase the number.
b. To decrease the magnification, decrease the number.
c. Press the Clear button.
4. Repeat the check.
Workcentre XD SERIES
Repairs and Adjustments
ADJ 6.8
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
ADJ 8.2 Lead Edge Deletion Purpose The purpose is to set the Lead Edge Deletion to within specification.
Check 1. Place the test pattern 82P524 (NASG and XCL) or 82P523 (XE) on the Document Glass
with Side A down and the lead edge against the registration edge.
2. Make two copies at 100% magnification and discard the first copy.
3. Check that the Lead Edge Deletion of the second copy is 1 to 4 mrn.
Adjustment 1. Enter Diagnostic Code 50-1.
2. Press the Exposure button until the Text lamp is lit.
NOTE: Each increment to the Copy Quantity display changes the deletion by 0.1 mm.
3. To change the Lead Edge Deletion, press the Copy Quantity buttons.
a. To increase the deletion, increase the number.
b. To decrease the deletion, decrease the number.
c. Press the Clear button.
4. Repeat the check.
ADJ 8.3 Trail Edge Deietion Purpose The purpose is to set the Trail Edge Deletion to within specification.
Check 1. Make a copy with the Document Cover Assembly open (Dark Dusting).
2. Check that the Trail Edge Deletion is a maximum of 4 mrn.
Adjustment 1. Enter Diagnostic Code 50-1.
2. Press the Exposure button until the Auto, Text, and Photo lamps are lit.
NOTE: Each increment to the Copy Quantity display changes the deletion by 0.1 mm. -.
3. To change the Trail Edge Deletion, press the Copy Quantity buttons.
a. To increase the deletion, increase the number.
b. To decrease the deletion, decrease the number.
c. Press the Clear button.
4. Repeat the check.
Repairs and Adjustments 4/00
ADJ 8.2, ADJ 8.3 4-1 10 Workcentre XD SERIES
AD9 8.4 Lead Edge Registration Purpose The purpose is to set the Lead Edge Registration to specification
NOTE: Th~s adjustment advances or delays the Reglstratlon Roller ON timing
Check 1 Enter Dlagnostlc Code 50-[Oil
2 Press the lmage Quality button untll the Text lamp IS Ilt
3 Record the value that IS displayed for Lead Edge Deletlon
4 Press the Copy Quantity buttons and set the Lead Edge Deletlon value to zero (0)
5 Press the Clear button to store the value and exlt dlagnostlcs
6 Place test pattern 82P524 (NASG and XCL) or 82P523 (XE) on the Document Glass with Slde A down and the lead edge agalnst the registratlon edge
7 Make two copies at 100% magnlflcatlon and dlscard the flrst copy
8 Check that the lead edge registratlon of the second copy IS 0 +I- 2mm
Adjustment 1 Enter D~agnostlc Code 50-1
2 Press the lmage Quallty button untll the Auto lamp is lit
3 Record the value that dlsplays on the Control Panel
NOTE: Each increment of 10 to the Copy Quantity display changes the lead edge regis- tration by 1.0 mm.
NOTE: Do not adjust the registration by pressing the Copy Quantity "ones" button. Press- ing the ''ones'' button while performing the adjustment procedure will change the Lead Edge Deletion only, not the Lead Edge Registration.
4. To change the Lead Edge Registration, press the Copy Quantity "tens" button.
a. To move the image toward the lead edge of the paper, increase the number.
b. To move the image away from the lead edge of the paper, decrease the number.
c. Press the Start button to run a copy at the new setting.
5. Check the lead edge registration on the copy.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the Lead Edge Registration is correct.
7. Press the Clear button to exit diagnostics.
8. Perform the Lead Edge Deletion adjustment (ADJ 8.2) and reset the in,itial value that is displayed (zero) to the setting that was recorded at in the Check section.
ADJ 8.5 SDWDSDF head Edge Registration Purpose The purpose is to set the SDFIDSDF Lead Edge Registration to specification.
NOTE: This adjustment advances or delays the document scan.
Check 1. Enter Diagnostic Code 50-[Ol].
2. Press the lmage Quality button until the Text lamp is lit.
3. Record the value that is displayed for Lead Edge Deletion.
4. Press the Copy Quantity buttons and set the Lead Edge Deletion value to zero (0).
5. Press the Clear button to store the value and exit diagnostics.
6. Place the test pattern 82E12130 in the SDFIDSDF with Side A facing up and the lead edge against the Paper Gate.
7. Make two copies at 100% magnification and discard the first copy.
8. Check that the SDFIDSDF Lead Edge Registration on the second copy is 0 +I- .2 mm.
Adjustment 1. Power the copierlprinter Off and then On.
2. Enter the Diagnostic Code 50-[I].
3. Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto and Text lamps are lit.
4. Record the setting value that is displayed on the Control Panel.
NOTE: Each increment of 10 to the Copy Quantity display changes the lead edge regis- tration by 1.0 mm.
NOTE: Do not adjust the registration with the Copy Quantity "ones" button. Pressing the "ones" button while performing the adjustment procedure will change the Lead Edge Deletion only, not the Lead Edge Registration.
5. To change the SDFIDSDF Lead Edge Registration, press the Copy Quantity "tens" but- ton.
a. To move the image toward the lead edge of the paper, decrease the number.
b. To move the image away from the lead edge of the paper, increase the number.
c. Press the Start button to run a copy at the new setting.
6. Check the SDFIDSDF Lead Edge Registration on the copy.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until the SDFIDSDF Lead Edge Registration is correct.
8. Press the Clear button to exit diagnostics.
9. Perform the Lead Edge Deletion adjustment (ADJ 8.2) and reset the initial value that is displayed (zero) to the setting that was recorded in the Check section.
4/00 Repairs and Adjustments
Workcentre XD SER~ES 4-1 11 ADJ 8.4, ADJ 8.5
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
ADJ 9.1 Developer Bias ADJ 9.2 Grid Bias Purpose The purpose is to adjust the developer bias voltage
Adjustment WARMING
Switch off the Fdairs Power SrrsEtch3 and disronnacl: the Power Cord 1ijiefsa.e Insertisvg the meter lead probes oriks the Power Suppiy PiVB, 1. Set the digital multi meter range to 400 VDC.
NOTE: An alternate hookup of the meter lead probes is at the rear of the machine. With the back cover off, connect the positive lead to P/J 9 pin 8. Connect the negative lead to chassis ground.
2. ( Figure I ) : Connect the positive lead to connector pin CN10-I
1 CNIO, pin 3 (left side)
Connect the Meter leads
Figure 1 Adjusting the Developer Bias Voltage
3. Connect the negative lead to CN10-2.
4. Enter Diagnostic Code 25-1. When Start is pressed, the Developer Bias is present for 30 seconds.
5. Adjust VR-121 for a voltage of -380 +I- 20 VDC.
Purpose The purpose IS to adjust the gr~d b~as voltage
Adjustment WARNING
Swiiil~cr~ o t ~ the Main Po~ber Sx.ril~sh, and d;scsiar;aci the Powe~ Card betcre Inserting Pin m t e r lesd probes on18 the Fouer Stspgll $Z%UB,
NOTE: Set the LOW output voltage first Set the HlGH output voltage last
1 . Set the d~g~ta l multl meter range to 4000 VDC
2. ( F~g~ i i e I) . Connect the posltlve lead to connector pin CN11-3
Figure 1 Adjusting the Grid Bias Voltage
3. Connect the negative lead to the Chassis Ground.
4. Enter Diagnostic Code 8-3.
5. Adjust VR-141 for a LOW output voltage of -420 +I- 20 VDC.
6. Enter Diagnostic Code 8-2.
7. Adjust VR-142 for a HlGH output voltage of -580 +I- 20 VDC.
Repairs and Adjustments
ADJ 9.1, ADJ 9.2
5 Parts List Introduction .....................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................. Subsystem Information ... Symbology ..................................................................................................................
COVERS PL 1.1 COVERS ........................................................................................................... PL 1.2 DOCUMENT GLASS COVER (XD10011021104) ...................... ... ................. PL 1.3 CONTROL CONSOLE (XD100110211041120F) .................... .. ..........................
"- . PL 1.4 SIDE DOOR .. .......................... ..........................................................................
DRlVES PL 2.1 DRIVES AND MID-FRAME COMPONENTS .................................................... PL 2.2 MAIN DRIVES ASSEMBLY ..............................................................................
OPTICS PL 3.1 OPTICS FRAME (1 OF 2) .................................................................................. PL 3.2 OPTICS FRAME (2 OF 2) ................................................................................... PL 3.3 LASER ASSEMBLY ............................................................................................. PL 3.4 HALF RATE CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY .............................................................
PAPER SUPPLY PL 4.1 250 SHEET TRAY ...............................................................................................
PAPER FEEDING PL 5.1 PAPER FEEDING AND DRIVES ......................................................................... PL 5.2 SINGLE SHEET BYPASS .................................................................................. PL 5.3 SINGLE BYPASS COVER .................................................................................. PL 5.4 MULTISHEET BYPASS COVER ......................................................................... PL 5.5 MULTISHEET BYPASS FEEDER ...................................................................... PL 5.6 MULTISHEET BYPASS TRAY .................................... .... .................................... PL 5.7 TRAY 2 FRAME ASSEMBLY .............................................................................. PL 5.8 TRAY 2 PAPER FEED ASSEMBLY ....................................................................
COPY TRANSPORTATION AND FUSING PL 6.1 FUSING (1 OF 2) ................................................................................................. PL 6.2 FUSING (2 OF 2) ................................................................................................. PL 6.3 OUTPUT TRANSPORT .......................................................................................
ELECTRICAL PL 7.1 A ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS (PART 1 OF 2) ................................................ PL 7.1 B ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS (PART 2 OF 2) ................................................ PL 7.2 DRUM CARTRIDGE CONTACT HOUSING ..................................................... PL 7.3 TRANSFERIDETACK COROTRON ASSEMBLY ............................................. PL 7.4 HARNESS'S ........................................................................................................
PACKAGING, ACCESSORIES AND CONSUMABLES .. PL 8.1A PACKAGING AND ACCESSORIES .................................................................
PACKAGING AND ACCESSORIES (XD155DF ONLY) PL 8.18 PACKAGING AND ACCESSORIES (XD155DF ONLY) .................................
PACKAGING. ACCESSORIES AND CONSUMABLES PL 8.2 DRUM AND TONER CARTRIDGES ........................... .. ................................. 5-36
DOCUMENT HANDLING ......................... ....................................................... PL 9.1 A SDFIDSDF ASSEMBLY .. 5-37
PL 9.1B SDFIDSDF ASSEMBLY .................................................................................... 5-38 ............................................................................ PL 9.2 SDFIDSDF FEED ASSEMBLY 5-39
PL 9.3 SDF TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY .......................................................................... 5-40 PL 9.4 SDFIDSDF TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY (XD155DFND130DF) ........................... 5-41 Part Number Index ...................................................................................................... 5-42
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Parts List
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Parts List 4/00 Reissue
5-2 Workcenter XD Series
Table 1 introduction Overview The Parts List section identifies all part numbers and the corresponding location of all spared subsystem components.
Organization Parts Lists
Each Item number in the part number l~st~ng corresponds to an item number In the related ~llustrat~on. All the parts in a glven subsystem of the mach~ne w~l l be located In the same ~llustratlon or In a series of associated ~llustrations.
Electrical Connectors and Fasteners This section contains the illustrations and descriptions of the plugs, jacks, and fasteners used in the machine. A part number listing of the connectors is included.
... " Common Hardware The common hardware is listed in alphabetical order by the letter or letters used to identify each item in the part number listing and in the illustrations. Dimensions are in millimeters unless otherwise identified.
Part Number index
This index lists all the spared parts in the machine in numerical order. Each number is followed by a reference to the parts list on which the part may be found.
Other information Abbreviations Abbreviations are used in the parts lists and the exploded view illustrations to provide information in a limited amount of space. The following abbreviations are used in this manual:
Table 1
I M I
1 Millimeters
Abbreviation
A3 A4
A5 AD
AWG
EM!
GB
KB
1 MOD I
I Maaneto Optical Drive 1
Meaning
297 x 420 M~ll~meters
210 x 297 Mill~meters
148 x 210 M~llrmeters
Auto Duplex
Amer~can W~re Gauge
Electro Magnetic lnduct~on
G~ga Byte
K~lo Byte
I Part List 1 I
I Part of
Table 2
Abbreviation
REF:
SCSl WI
W/O
Meaning
Refer to
Small Computer Systems Interface With
Without
Americas Operations
United States Marketing Operations
United States Operations Xerox Canada Limited
Xerox Europe
Abbreviation
Symbology
Operating Companies
Meaning
Symbology used in the Parts List section is identified in the Symbology section.
Service Procedure Referencing If a part or assembly has an associated repair or adjustment procedure, the procedure number will be listed at the end of the part description in the parts lists e.g. (REP 5.1, ADJ 5.3)
I RIE I Reduction/Enlaraement
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Parts List
introduction
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Subsystem Information Use of the Term "Assembly" The term "assembly" will be used for items in the part number listing that include other itemized parts in the part number listing. When the word "assembly is found in the part number listing, there will be a corresponding item number on the illustrations followed by a bracket and a listing of the contents of the assembly.
Brackets A bracket is used when an assembly or kit is spared, but is not shown in the illustration. The item number of the assembly or kit precedes the bracket; the item numbers of the piece parts follow the bracket.
Tag The notation "W/Tagm in the parts description indicates that the part configuration has been updated. Check the change Tag index in the General lnformation section of the Service Data for the name and purpose of the modification.
In some cases, a part or assembly may be spared in two versions: with the Tag and without the Tag. In those cases, use whichever part is appropriate for the configuration of the machine on which the part is to be installed. If the machine does not have a particular Tag and the only replacement part available is listed as "WTTag," install the Tag kit or all of the piece parts. The Change Tag Index tells you which kit or piece parts you need.
Whenever you install a Tag kit or all the piece parts that make up a Tag, mark the appropriate number on the Tag matrix.
Parts List 4/00 Reissue Subsystem Information 5-4 Workcenter XD Series
Svmbaloav A Tag number within a circle having a shaded bar and pointing to an item number shows that - - the configuration of the part shown is the configuration before the part was changed by the Tag
A Tag number within a circle pointing to an item number shows that the part has been changed number within the circle (Figure 2,, by the tag number within the circle (Figure 1). Information on the modification is in the Change
Tag Index
Figure 1 With Tag Symbol
Figure 2 Without Tag Symbol
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Parts List
Symbology
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
A tag number within a circle with no apex shows that the entire drawing has been changed by A tag number within a circle with no apex and having a shaded bar shows that the entire the tag number within the circle (Figure 3). Information on the modification is in the Change Tag drawing was the configuration before being changed by the tag number within the circle Index. (Figure 4).
Figure 3 Entire Drawing With Tag Symbol Figure 4 Entire Drawing Without Tag Symbol
Parts List
Symbology Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
PL 1.WGOVERS Item Part Description
1 21\11 566 FRONT DOOR (XE) - 2N1525 FRONT DOOR (USO/XCL) 2 - OUTPUT TRAY (USOIXCL) (REP
14.7) 3 - SCREW (3x8)
4 50N259 TRAY EXTENSION (XE) - 50N230 TRAY EXTENSION (USOIXCL) 5 - SCREW (4x12)
6 - CONTROL CONSOLE (REP 14.5)
(REF: PL 1.3) 7 152N1630 CONTROL CONSOLE HARNESS 8 - HARNESS 9 - SCREW (3x8)
10 - TOP LEFT COVER 11 - INSTRUCTION LABEL
12 90N138 DOCUMENT GLASS ASSEMBLY (USOIXCL) (REP 6.1) (XD1001102 ONLY)
- 90N144 (XCL)(XD103F, XD105F, XD120F,
XD125F, XDl30DF, XD155DF) - 90N140 (USO)(XD103F, XD105F,
XD130DF, XD155DF) XD120F, XD125F,
- 90N139 (XE) (REP 6.1) (XD100/102/104)
13 - REGISTRATION GUIDE 14 1 N299 CALIBRATION STRIP 15 - ADHESIVE STRIP 16 - DOCUMENT GLASS 17 2N1591 TOP RIGHT COVER (USOIXCL
ONLY) - 21\11 729 TOP RIGHT COVER (XE ONLY)
18 - REAR COVER 19 - CAUTION LABEL 20 - LABEL 21 - SERVICE LABEL
22 - FAN GASKET 23 53N142 OZONE FILTER 24 1 N300 DOCUMENT GLASS EDGE 25 - SDF WINDOW 26 - SDF GLASS CUSHION 27 - SMALL REAR COVER
(XD120F,XD103F,XD105F) 28 38N274 REAR SHIELD(XD103FI105F
I1 20F/155DF/125F/130DF) 29 38N275 FRONT SHIELD
(XD103F/105F/120F/155DF I1 25Fl130DF)
30 - CUSHION (XDl55DF) 31 - TAPE (XD155DF)
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Parts List
PL 1 .I
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
PL 1.2 DOCUMENT GLASS COVER (XD1 0011 0211 04) Item Part Description
1 - REAR PIVOT ATTACHMENT
2 - DOCUMENT COVER
3 - DOCUMENT COVER CUSHION 4 - DOCUMENT ORGANIZER 5 21\11 534 DOCUMENT COVER ASSEMBLY
(W/ORGANIZER) (XD1001104) 6 2N1526 DOCUMENT COVER ASSEMBLY
(WIO ORGANIZER) (XD1 02)
Parts List
PL 1.2 Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
PL 6.3 CONTROL CONSOLE (XDI 0011 02/1041120F) Item Part Description
1 53N162 CONTROL BUTTON COVER
- (AO)(XE)
53N 163 (XD1 02) (USO) - 53N165 (XD104) (XE) (ACO) - 53N166 (XDI 00) (USO) - 53N172 (XD105F) - 53N176 (XD103F) - 53N170 (XD120F) - 53N175 (XD155DF) (USO) - - (XD102) (XE) (AO)
2 - CONTROL CONSOLE COVER
3 3N673 START PRINT BUTTON 4 - CLEARISTOP BUTTON 5 - FUNCTION BUTTON (R) 6 - FUNCTION BUTTON (L) 7 - BOOK MODE SELECT BUTTON 8 140N5223 CONTROL CONSOLE PWB
(XDI05F, XD103F) - 140N5206 CONTROL CONSOLE PWB
(XDl20F/155DF/125F I1 30DF) - 14bN5641 CONTROL CONSOLE PWB
(XDl04)(XE ONLY) - 140N5107 CONTROL CONSOLE PWB
(XD1001102) 9 - GROUNDING SPRING
10 - SCREW (3x8) 11 21\11 593 CONTROL CONSOLE
SURROUND
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Parts List
Pb 1.3
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
.4 SlDE DOOR Part Description 21\11 730 SIDE DOOR (USOIXCL) 2N1731 SIDE DOOR (XE) 3N668 SIDE DOOR LATCH 9N978 LATCH SPRING - HINGE GUIDE - GROUNDING PLATE - GROUNDING SPRING - SCREW (3x6) - SCREW (3x6) - INNER PAPER GUIDE - SCREW (3x1 0) 9N964 PRESSURE SPRING 152N1635 GROUND WIRE - GROUNDING SPRING
9N962 PRESSURE SPRING - SHAFT - E-RING
22E22060 UPPER ROLLER 19N415 TRANSFERIDETACK COROTRON
(REP 9.2) - SCREW (3x8) (XD155DF)
7N750 DUPLEX DRIVE GEAR (XD155DF) 7N751 DUPLEX DRIVE GEAR A
(XD155DF) 22N1002 DUPLEX DRIVE ROLLER
(XD155DF) (REP 5.28) 9N1027 DUPLEX PRESSURE SPRING
(XD155DF)
Parts List
PL 1.4 Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
PL 2.mBRlVES AND MID-FRAME COMPONENTS Item Part Description
1 22N926 EXIT ROLLER (REP 8.9) 2 - BEARING 3 22N925 LOWER TRANSPORT ROLLER
(REP 8.11) 4 - PULLEY (22T) 5 23N596 EXIT DRIVE BELT - 23N634 DUPLEX DRIVE BELT
(XD155DFlXD130DF) 6 - CABLE TIE 7 - COUPLING 8 - SPRING 9 127N972 TONER MOTOR (MOT 4) (REP
9.1) 10 - SCREW (3x1 0) 11 - SCREW (3x30) 12 127N971 VENTILATION FAN (MOT 3) (REP
10.6) - 127K30260 VENTILATION FAN (MOT 3) 13 - TRANSFER COROTRON
CONTACT HOUSING 14 - BIAS CONTROL PLATE 15 - SCREW (3x6) 16 - TRANSFER COROTRON PLATE 17 - SCREW (3x6) 18 - BIAS CONTROL HARNESS 19 - TRANSFER COROTRON
HARNESS 20 - MANUAL EXIT DRIVE BELT (REP
8.10) 2 1 - CENTER FRAME 22 - MANUAL EXIT KNOB 23 - FUSER JAM SENSOR HARNESS 24 152N1660 (230V) - 152N1623 FUSER HEAT ROD HARNESS
(1 OOV) 25 - HARNESS GUIDE 26 - GUIDE PIN 27 - DVSHARNESS 28 - SCREW (3x6) 29 - SCREW (3x8) 30 - SCREW (4x12) 31 - DUPLEX MOTOR MOUNTING
BRACKET (XD155DF ONLY) 32 - DUPLEX SPACER (XD155DF
ONLY) 33 - SCREW (3x1 0) (XD155DF) 34 - SCREW (3x6) (XD155DF) 35 127N996 EXlT DRIVE MOTOR (MOT5)
(XD155DF) (REP 5.30) 36 - SHIELD (XD155DF)
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
--
Parts List
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
PL 2.2 MAIN DRIVES ASSEMBLY Item Bart Description
1 - MAIN DRIVE ASSEMBLY (REP
8.12) 2 127N969 MAIN DRIVE MOTOR (MOT 1)
(REP 4.1) 3 - SPRING
4 - GEAR
5 - PULLEY
6 - GEAR (28T)
7 - GEAR (4611 6T)
8 - GEAR (3011 5T)
9 - DRIVE GEAR ASSEMBLY
10 - GEAR (3711 5T) 11 - GEAR (68126T) 12 - COUPLING GEAR (34T) 13 - RATCHET GEAR (21T) 14 - RATCHET GEAR (28T) 15 - SPRING 16 - GEAR (5511 9T) 17 - GEAR (3312011 5T) 18 - GEAR (20T) 19 - GEAR (31117T) 20 - MAIN DRIVE BRACKET 2 1 - SCREW (3x4)
22 121 N401 SOLENOID REGISTRATION ROLL (SOL 3) (REP 8.2)
23 - SPRING 24 - PAWL 25 121 N400 SOLENOID PAPER FEED (SOL 1)
(REP 8.1) - 121N421 SOLENOID PAPER FEED
(XD155DF) 26 - PAWL 27 - SCREW (4x6) 28 152N1633 MAIN MOTOR HARNESS
Parts List
PL 2.2 Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Pk 3.WPTICS FRAME (1 OF 2) Item Part Description
1 - SCAN CABLE
2 - HALF RATE CARRIAGE
ASSEMBLY 3 62N139 EXPOSURE LAMP CARRIAGE
(REP 6.2) 4 - CABLE CLAMP
5 - SCREW (3x5)
6 - EXPOSURE LAMP HARNESS
7 - SCREW
8 - PULLEY STUD PLATE
9 - PULLEY
10 - PULLEY 11 - E-RING 12 - OPTICS FRAME 13 - SCREW (3x8) 14 - SCAN RAIL (REAR) 15 - SCAN RAIL (FRONT) 16 - SCREW 17 - E-RING 18 7N694 SCAN DRIVE GEARIPULLEY 19 - MOTOR TENSION SPRING 20 127K30270 SCAN DRIVE MOTOR (MOT 2)
(REP 6.3) 2 1 - SCAN DRIVE MOTOR MOUNTING
PLATE 22 - E-RING 23 - BEARING 24 - SPRING PIN (3MM) 25 - SCAN DRIVE PULLEY 26 - SCAN DRIVE BELT 27 - SCREW (3x4) 28 - SCAN CABLE HUB 29 - SCREW (4x6) 30 - SCAN CABLE DRIVE SHAFT 3 1 - BEARING
32 - WASHER 33 - OPTICS FRAME ASSEMBLY (REP
6.6)
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Parts List
PL 3.1
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Pb 3.2 OPTICS FRAME (2 OF 2) Item Part Description
1 - SCREW (3x8)
2 - LENS COVER 3 - EXPOSURE LAMP HARNESS
4 - HARNESS GUIDE 5 152N1632 CCD HARNESS 6 - SCREW 7 62N141 LENSICCD MODULE (REP 6.5) 8 - - SCREW(3X8) 9 140N5112 SCAN HOME SENSOR (Q5) 10 - DOCUMENT GLASS CUSHION 11 - RIBBON GUIDE 12 - PROTECTOR SHEET 13 - DISCHARGE BRUSH 14 - OPTICS FRAME GUIDE 15 - UPPER DUPLEX PAPER GUIDE 16 - CAUTION LABEL 17 - CCDHARNESSCOVER 18 - CCD PWB COVER 19 - FERRITE HOLDER 20 - LOWER SHEET 2 1 - SCREW (4x12) 22 - FERRITE 23 - CUSHION 24 - SDF LEFT HINGE GUIDE 25 - SDF RIGHT HINGE GUIDE 26 - SCREW (3x8) (XD120F) 27 - WIRE BAND (XD120F) 28 - BAND (PLTIM) (XD120F) 29 - WIRE HOLDER (LWS-1 M)
(XD120F) 30 - CUSHION (XD155DF) 3 1 - CRlP HOLDER (XD155DF)
Parts List
PL 3.2 Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
PL 3.3 LASER ASSEMBLY Item Part Description
1 - SCREW (3x6)
2 - LASER HARNESS COVER
3 152N1718 LASER HARNESS (XDI 0011 0211 0411 03Fl 105Fl1 20Fl155F) (WIO [TAG 1 I )
- 152N1692 LASER HARNESS
(XD10011021104/103F/ 105Fi120F1155F) (W/[TAG 11) LASER HARNESS (XD125F/XD130DF)
4 - TIE WRAP
5 62N142 LASER MODULE (XDI 0011 0211 0411 03F/ 105F/120F/155F) (W/O [TAG 11)
- 62N173 LASER MODULE
(XD100/102/104/103F/ 105F/120F/155F) (W/[TAG 11) LASER MODULE (XD125FlXD130DF)
6 - SPRING
7 - SCREW
8 - SPIRAL WRAP (XD155DF)
Reissue
Workcenter. XD Series
Parts List
PL 3.3
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
PL 3.4 HALF RATE CARRlAGE ASSEMBLY item Part Description
1 - LIGHT SHIELD
2 - HALF RATE CARRIAGE
3 - SCREW (4x6)
4 - PULLEY
5 - GUIDE
6 - SCREW (4x6)
7 1 ON64 SLIDE BUTTON 8 - SCREW 9 - PULLEY BRACKET (REAR) 10 - CUSHION (REAR) 11 19E26730 MIRROR CLIP 12 62N140 MIRROR 13 - PULLEY BRACKET (FRONT) 14 - CUSHION (FRONT) 15 - HALF RATE CARRIAGE
ASSEMBLY
Parts List
PL 3.4 Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
PL 4.1 250 SHEET TRAY Item
1 2 3 4 5 6
Part Description PAPER PRESSURE PLATE RETARD PAD PRESSURE PLATE LOCK PAPER SIZE GUIDE FRONT PAPER GUIDE FRONT PAPER SNUBBER E-RING LABEL SCREW (3x8) WASHER GEAR LOAD LABEL REAR PAPER GUIDE REAR PAPER SNUBBER LIFT SPRING TRAY SPRING SPRING PLATE RELEASE TRAY FRAME LABEL 250 SHEET PAPER TRAY
Reissue 4/00 Parts List
Workcenter XB Series 5-1 7 PL 4.1
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
PL 5.1 PAPER FEEDING AND DRIVES Item Part
1 140N5109 Description TRAY 1 PAPER FEED SENSOR (Ql) (REP 8.3) SENSOR ACTUATOR ACTUATOR SPRING SCREW (3x1 0) UPPER FRONT PAPER GUIDE E-RING LOWER REGISTRATION ROLLER (REP 8.13) BEARING CLUTCH GEAR (26T) CLUTCH SLEEVE CLUTCH SPRING SPRING PIN CLUTCH BOSS E-RING CLUTCH BOSS CLUTCH SPRING CLUTCH SLEEVE CLUTCH GEAR (29T) BEARING PAPER FEED ROLLER (REP 8.6) GEAR (33T) GEAR (21129T) GEAR (30T) GEAR SUPPORT BRACKET GROUNDING PLATE TRAY DETECT SWITCH (52) (REP 8.14) DRUM RESET SWITCH (S6) TRAY DETECT SWITCH HARNESS (REP 8.5) BASE FRAME RETARD PAD RETARD ARM LIFT SPRING RETARD SUPPORT PLATE SPRING (XD100/102) PAPER GUIDE SCREW (4x1 2) RETARD PAD (XDI 04) SCREW (3x8) SENSOR COVER D-RST HARNESS SCREW (3x12) FRONT LEVER SPRING FRONT LEVER PLATE WASHER GUIDE (XD155DF) SCREW (4x12) (XD120F) FIXING PLATE (XD120F) JOINT GEAR (XD120F) E-RING (XD120F)
Parts List
PL 5.1 Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
PL 5.2 SINGLE SHEET BYFaBSS Item Part Description
1 22N933 SINGLE BYPASS ASSEMBLY 2 - GROUND WIRE
3 - TIE WRAP
4 - SCREW (3x6)
5 - PAPER FEED BRACKET
6 - GEAR (27T)
7 - E-RING
8 - SCREW 3x8)
9 - GEAR (16T)
10 - SPRING PIN 11 - BUSHING 12 22N932 TRANSPORT ROLLER (REP 8.7) 13 - BYPASS FRAME 14 - GROUNDING SPRING 15 - SCREW (3x6) 16 - ACTUATOR SPRING 17 - ACTUATOR 18 - SPRING 19 140N5106 SINGLE SHEET BYPASS FEED
SENSOR ((22) (REP 8.4) 20 - DUPLEX UPPER GUIDE 2 1 - SINGLE BYPASS GUIDE (R)
22 - SINGLE BYPASS GUIDE (F) 23 - SCREW (3x6) 24 22E22060 BYPASS ROLL 25 - SINGLE BYPASS FRAME 26 - SPRING 27 - PAPER FEED GEAR 28 - SCREW (3x6) 29 - GROUNDING SPRING 30 - SCREW (3x6) 31 - GROUNDING SPRING 32 - SCREW (4x12) 33 22N930 SINGLE BYPASS UPPER
ASSEMBLY
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Parts List
PL 5.2
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
PL 5.3 SlNGLE BYPASS COVER Item Part Description
1 42E1430 COROTRON CLEANER 2 - SCREW
3 - UPPERCOVER
4 110N783 SIDE DOOR INTERLOCK SWITCH (S3lS4) (24Vl5V) (REP 8.8)
5 - SCREW (2x16)
6 - SWITCH ACTUATOR
7 - CAUTION LABEL (XE)
Parts List 4/00 Reissue Ph 5.3 5-20 Workcenter XD Series
PL 5.4 MULTISHEET BYPASS COVER Item Part Description
1 42E1430 COROTRON CLEANER SCREW UPPER COVER SIDE DOOR INTERLOCK SWITCH (S3/S4) (24Vl5V) (REP 8.8) CAUTION LABEL (XE) SWITCH ACTUATOR
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Parts List
PL 5.4
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
PL 5.5 MULTISHEET BYPASS FEEDER ltem Part Description
1 5E10560 FEED ROLL (REP 8.15) 2 - E-RING
3 - GEAR (20T)
4 - ROLL SUPPORT
5 22E20680 RETARD ROLL (REP 8.1 6) 6 - SPRING PIN
7 - GEAR (16T)
8 - SHAFT 9 - BUSHING
10 - SUPPORT 11 - SCREW (3x8) 12 - UPPER GUIDE 13 - SCREW (3x6) 14 - GROUNDING SPRING 15 - CLUTCH BOSS 16 9E57550 FEED CLUTCH SPRING 17 5E9640 CLUTCH SLEEVE 18 - CLUTCH BOSS 19 - GEAR (27T) 20 - GEAR (20T) 2 1 - TIE WRAP 22 - GROUNDING WIRE 23 - SCREW (3x6) 24 - SCREW (3x6) 25 - SUPPORT PLATE 26 - CLUTCH SLEEVE 27 - CLUTCH SPRING 28 - CLUTCH BOSS 29 - MULTl BYPASS SOLENOID
(SOL4) (REP 8.17) 30 - SOLENOID SPRING 31 - RATCHET ARM 32 - RATCHET ARM 33 - SPRING 34 - SCREW (3x8) 35 - FRAME 36 - SCREW (4x12) 37 - GATE 38 - SUPPORT FRAME 39 - ARM 40 - HINGE 41 - SPRING 42 22N948 FEEDER ASSEMBLY
Parts List
PL 5.5 Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
PL 5.6 MULTISHEET BYPASS TRAY Item Part
1 50N231 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 - 8 - 9 -
Description
TRAY ASSEMBLY REAR GUIDE FRONT GUIDE TRAY COVER SPRING GEAR SCREW (3x6) TRAY BASE TRAY EXTENSION
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Parts List
PL 5.6
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
PL 5.7 TRAY 2 FRAME ASSEMBLY item Part Description
1 - FRONT COVER
2 - SCREW (4x12)
3 - REAR COVER
4 - LEFT TRAY GUIDE
5 - SCREW (4x12)
6 - REAR TIE PLATE
7 - RUBBER FOOT
8 - RIGHT TRAY GUIDE
9 809E11980 TRANSPORT COVER SPRING 10 - TRANSPORT COVER 11 22N970 IDLER ROLLER 12 9N1072 IDLER SPRING 13 31N159 ARM 14 2N1559 LOWER SIDE DOOR (USOMCL) - 21\11 576 LOWER SIDE DOOR (XE) 15 - SCREW (4x8) 16 - SCREW (3x1 6) 17 - TRAY 2 FEED ASSEMBLY 18 - TRAY 2 HARNESS 19 - 250 CASSETTE ASSEMBLY
Parts List
PL 5.7 Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
PL 5.8 TRAY 2 PAPER FEED ASSEMBLY Item Part Description
1 22N1029 TRAY 2 TRANSPORT ROLLER (REP 8.23)
2 - BEARING (B-F5-13)
3 - E-RING
4 - DRIVE FRAME
5 - GEAR (20T)
6 - SPRING PIN
7 - CLUTCH BOSS
8 - CLUTCH SPRING
9 - CLUTCH SLEEVE
10 - CLUTCH GEAR (29T) (REP 8.24) 11 - GEAR (40) 12 - ARM 13 809E12000 SPRING 14 - TRAY 2 HARNESS 15 110E5370 TRAY 2 PAPER FEED SENSOR
(Q7) (REP 8.20) 16 - ACTUATOR 17 - GROUND SPRING 18 121 N411 TRAY 2 PAPER FEED SOLENOID
(SOL 2) (REP 8.22) 19 - SCREW (3x6) 20 7N742 CLUTCH PAWL 21 809E12010 CLUTCH PAWL SPRING 22 - GEAR (1 8126T) 23 7E29490 GEAR (1 6T) 24 110N817 TRAY 2 DETECT SWITCH (S5)
(REP 8.21 ) 25 - TRAY 2 FEED ROLLER (REP 8.25) 26 - TRAY 2 FEED ASSEMBLY
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Parts List
PL 5.8
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
PL 6.1 FUSING ("sF 2) Item Part Description
1 - PAPER GUIDE (REP 10.10)
2 103N206 RESISTOR (112 W) 3 117N1312 GROUND WIRE 4 115N284 DISCHARGE BRUSH 5 - END COVER 6 - HEAT ROD SPRING (F) 7 - FUSER UPPER FRAME 8 - SCREW (3x6) 9 130E7840 THERMISTOR (RT1) (REP 10.4) 10 - SCREW (3x1 0) 11 7N695 STRIPPER FINGER (REP 10.11) 12 130E9190 THERMOSTAT (REP 10.9) 13 140N5110 FUSER JAM SENSOR (Q3) (REP
10.5) 14 - HEAT ROD SPRING (R) 15 - END COVER (R) 16 152N1661 HARNESS (230V) - 152N1624 FUSER ASSEMBLY HARNESS
(1 OOV) 17 - TIE WRAP 18 3E10140 RETAINING RING 19 7E14961 DRIVE GEAR (45T) 20 13E12780 BEARING 2 1 22E23440 HEAT ROLL (REP 10.2) 22 122N133 HEAT ROD (230V) (REP 10.8) - 122N115 HEAT ROD (120V) (REP 10.8) 23 - SCREW 24 126N70 FUSER ASSEMBLY (230V) (REP
10.1) - 126N58 FUSER ASSEMBLY (1 20V) (REP
10.1) - 126N96 ALTERNATE
24 ( 1 - 20, ITEM 1 ON PL6.2
Parts List
PL 6.1 Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
PL 6.2 FUSING (2 OF 2) Itern Part Description
1 - FUSER ASSEMBLY (PI0 PL 6.1 Item 24)
2 - E-RING 3 38N230 FUSER GATE (REP 10.12) 4 809E43360 GATE SPRING (NOT SPARED) 5 - SCREW
6 - FRONT PAPER GUIDE SHEET
7 - FRONT PAPER GUIDE
8 - GROUNDING STRAP
9 - HIGH TEMP CAUTION LABEL
10 - SCREW (3x12) 11 - FUSER LOWER FRAME 12 - PRESSURE ROLL STRIPPER
FINGERS 13 31 N166 PRESSURE ROLL ARM (F) 14 22N924 PRESSURE ROLL (REP 10.3) 15 - WASHER 16 9N1088 PRESSURE SPRING 17 13E5110 PRESSURE ROLL BEARING 18 31 1\11 67 PRESSURE ROLL ARM (R) 19 - HANDLE LABEL 20 600K87880 FUSER STRIPPER FINGER KIT
(USO/XCL ONLY) - 1 N305 FUSER STRIPPER ASSEMBLY
(XE ONLY)
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Parts List
PL 6.2
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
PL 6.3 OUTPUT TRANSPORT Part Description
UPPER EXIT ROLLER TENSION SPRING PWB INSULATOR EXlT SENSOR (Q4) (REP 10.7) SENSOR ACTUATOR EXlT GUIDE TENSION SPRING UPPER ROLLER GROUNDING SPRING CONTROL CONSOLE RIBBON CABLE FERRITE RETAINER FERRITE
Parts List
Pb 6.3 Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
PL 7.1 A ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS (PART 1 OF 2) item Part Description
1 - SCREW (3x6)
2 - PWB COVER
3 - CONNECTOR CAP
4 140N5114 GDI PWB 5 140N5113 GDI MEMORY PWB (4 MEG) - 140N5210 GDI MEMORY PWB (6MEG)
(XD155DF/XD130DF ONLY) 6 152N1662 (230V) - - CENTER FRAME HARNESS
(1 OOV) 7 - FUSERHARNESS
8 - MAIN PWB (REF PL7.1B ITEM 1) 9 - PWB MOUNTING BRACKET
10 - SCREW (3x1 0) 11 - SCREW (3x10) 12 152N1660 (230V) - 152N1623 FUSER HEAT ROD HARNESS
(1 20V) 13 140N5115 POWER SUPPLY PWB (120V)
(PSl)(REP 1.2, ADJ 9.1) (XDl 0011 0211 0411 25) (USOIXC)
- 140N5207 POWER SUPPLY PWB (120V)
(XD120F1130DF1125F I1 05Fl103F/155DF) (USOIXC)
- 140N5117 POWER SUPPLY PWB (230V)
(XD100110211041120F I1 O3F)(XE) 14 - SCREW 15 - SCREW (4x12)
16 - STIFFENER BAR
17 - BASE FRAME 18 - RUBBER FOOT 19 - 2ND TRAY CONNECTOR COVER 20 - 2ND TRAY GEAR COVER 2 1 108E3660 FUSE (1 5A)(250V) - - FUSE (F1) (1 0A) (250V) 22 108E5330 FUSE (F3) (15A) (250V) - - FUSE (F3) (5A) (125V) 23 117E9750 POWER CORD (60HZ) 24 - POWER RECEPTACLE (REP 1.4) 25 152N1652 GDI HARNESS 26 - TIE WRAP (XD155DF) 27 - FERRITE CORE (XD155DF) 28 130N911 DOCUMENT COVER CLOSED
SENSOR ((29) (XD155DF)
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Parts List
PL 7.1A
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
PL 7.1 8 ELECTRlCAL COMPONENTS (PART 2 OF 2) Item Part
1 140N5473
Description MAlN PWB (WIO [TAG 11) (XDlOO, XD102, XD104) (REP 1 . I , ADJ 9.1 ADJ 9.2) ALTERNATE (WIO [TAG I ] ) (XD100, XD102, XD104) MAlN PWB (W/[TAG I ] ) (XD100, XD102, XD104) MAlN PWB (WI[TAG 11) (XD105F, XDIOSF) MAlN PWB (WIO [TAG 11) (XD12OF)(SERIAL# DR7000501 -DR7061102) MAlN PWB (WIO [TAG 11) (XD120F)(SERIAL# DR7061103-DR7062812) MAlN PWB (WIO [TAG I ] ) (XD155DF) MAlN PWB (W/[TAG I ] ) (XD155DF) MAlN PWB (WIO [TAG I ] ) (XDI OSF)(SERIAL# FL7000501 -FL7071476) (XD1 OSF)(SERIAL# FL9000501 -FL9052780) MAlN PWB (WIO [TAG 11) (XD105F)(SERIAL# FL7071477-FL7072844) (XDI 03F)(SERIAL# FL9052781 -FL9053920) MAlN PWB (WI[TAG I ] ) (XDI20F) (WIO [TAG 11) (XD125F) MAlN PWB (XD130DF) MOUNTING BRACKET (NOT SPARED) BASE FRAME (NOT SPARED) PWB COVER (NOT SPARED)
Parts List
Pb 7.1 8 Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Pb 7.2 DRUM CARTRIDGE CONTACT HOUSING
Part Description DRUM CARTRIDGE CONTACT HOUSING CHARGECOROTRONHARNESS GRID BIASIMAIN PWB HARNESS SCREW (3x6) CONTACT SPRING CONTACT SPRING CONTACT SPRING SCREW (3x8)
Reissue 4/00 Parts List
Workcenter XD Series 5-31 PI.. 7.2
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
PL 7.3 TRANSFEWDETAGK COROTRON ASSEMBLY Item Part Description
1 - DETACK COROTRON
2 - GUIDE
3 - INSULATOR
4 - FRONT GUIDE
5 - SCREW (3x6) 6 - CONTACT COVER (R)
7 - TENSION SPRING
8 600K15950 TRANSFER COROTRON WIRE 9 - SPRING BRACKET
10 - TRANSFER COROTRON SPRING 11 - BC SPRING
12 - GROUNDING SPRING 13 - CONTACT COVER (F) 14 - COROTRON HOUSING 15 - PLATE 16 - GROUNDING PLATE 17 19N415 TRANSFERIDETACK COROTRON
ASSEMBLY (REP 9.2)
Parts List
Pb 7.3 Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
PL 7.4 HARNESS'S ltern Part Description
1 - CL LEAD HARNESS
2 152N1632 ICU-CCD HARNESS 3 - CENTER FRAME HARNESS
(1 OOV) 4 152N1630 OP HARNESS 5 152N1633 MAIN MOTOR HARNESS 6 - DVSHARNESS
7 - PPD2 INTERFACE HARNESS
8 152N1623 HL HARNESS (100V)
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Parts List
PL 7.4
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
PL 8.1A PACKAGING AND ACCESSORIES item Part Description
TOP PACKING CUSHION (L) TOP PACKING CUSHION (R) POWER CORD TIE WRAP BAG BAG HALF RATE CARRIAGE SHIPPING SCREW SHIPPING STRAP BOTTOM PACKING CUSHION BOX SHIPPING CUSHION THUMB SCREW LABEL DOCUMENT COVER CUSHION PRESSURE BLOCK LEVER ALTERNATE PRINTER CABLE
0000021 B-SKW
Parts List 4/00 Reissue %>L 8.1 A 5-34 Workcenter XD Series
Ph 8.W PACKAGING AND ACCESSORIES (XB155BF ONLY) item Part Description
1 - TOP PACKING CUSHION (L)
2 - TOP PACKING CUSHION (R)
3 117E9750 POWER CORD (60HZ) 4 - TIE WRAP
5 - BAG
6 - BAG
7 - SHIPPING CUSHION
8 - SHIPPING CUSHION
9 - BOTTOM PACKING CUSHION
10 - BOX 11 - SHIPPING CUSHION 12 120E10520 THUMB SCREW 13 - LABEL 14 - DOCUMENT COVER CUSHION 15 - SHIPPING STRAP 16 26E39240 HALF RATE CARRIAGE
SHIPPING SCREW 17 7N696 PRESSURE BLOCK LEVER 18 117E19340 PRINTER CABLE - 11 7E18690 ALTERNATE 19 - PACKING CUSHION 20 - PACKING CUSHION
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Parts List
PL 8.dB
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
PL 8.2 DRUM AND TONER CARTRIDGES Item Part Description
1 6R914 TONER CARTRIDGE (USO) - 6R915 TONER CARTRIDGE (XCL) 2 13R551 DRUM CARTRIDGE (USO) - 13R552 DRUM CARTRIDGE (XCL)
Parts List
Pb 8.2 Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
PL 9.1A SBFIDSDF ASSEMBLY item Part Description
1 - DOCUMENT TRAY
2 - FRONT GUIDE
3 - REAR GUIDE
4 - FEED RACK
5 - SCREW (3X8X)
6 - GEAR
7 - SPRING
8 - LOWER COVER
9 50N274 DUPLEX TRAY (XD155DF) (DUPLEX)
10 - DSDF COVER (XD155DF) 11 - SDF FEED ASSEMBLY (REF: PL
9.2 Item 36) 12 - TIE WRAP 13 - SCREW (4x10) SCREW (4x12)
(XD155DF) 14 - SCREW (4x10) SCREW (4x14)
(XD155DF) 15 - SCREW (4x10) SCREW (3x10)
(XD155DF) 16 - SCREW (3x6) (XD155DF) 17 121 N419 DSDF DEFLECTION GATE
SOLENOID (SOL3)(DUPLEX) (XD155DF) (REP 5.29)
18 - LEVER (XD155DF)
19 - SPRING (XD155DF)
20 - STOPPER (XD155DF) 2 1 - MYLAR GUIDE
22 - SCREW (3x14) (XD155DF) 23 - MOTOR PAD (XD155DF) 24 - SCREW (3x8) (XD155DF) 25 - LEVER (XD155DF) 26 - BEARING (XD155DF) 27 - E RING (XD155DF) 28 50N272 DSDF DEFLECTION GATE
(XD155DF) 29 38N273 MYLAR GUIDE 30 50N257 BASE - 50N275 BASE (DUPLEX)(XD155DF) - 50N269 (XD103F, XD120F) 31 - CUSHION (XD155DF)
32 22N999 SDF ASSEMBLY (XD103F, XDl 2OF) (XE)
- 22N992 SDF ASSEMBLY (REP 5.1 5) - 22N1031 SDF ASSEMBLY
(XD155DFiXD130DF)
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Parts List
PL 9.lA
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
PL 9.1 8 SDFIDSDF ASSEMBLY Part 50N257 50N275 4N192 -
Description
BASE BASE (XD155DF) DOCUMENT COVER CUSHION SCREW (4x10) SCREW (4x14) (XD155DF) HINGE LEFT PAD PAD (XD155DF)(DUPLEX) E-RING (XD155DF) SDF EXlT ROLLER (DUPLEX)(REP 5.10) SPONGE (DUPLEX) SPONGE (XDl55DF) (DUPLEX) EXlT SHAFT EXlT SHAFT (XD155DF) (DUPLEX) SCREW (3x8) BEARING (XD155DF) E-RING (XD155DF) PRESSURE PLATE (XD155DF)(DUPLEX) SCREW (3x10) (XD155DF) WRAP SPRING (F) (XD155DF) WRAP SPRING (R) (XD155DF) SPRING SHAFT (XD155DF) SDF TRANSPORT ROLLER (REP 5.9) TRANSPORT SHAFT SPRING PAD (XD155DF)(DUPLEX) PAD (REF: PL 9.1 B ltem 5) HINGE RIGHT GROUND STRAP SCREW (3x14) (XD155DF) BASE PLATE GROUND SPRING (XD155DF) SCREW (3x8) GROUND SPRING (XD155DF) DSDF ASSEMBLY (BOTTOM) (PI0 PL 9.1A ltem 32)
Parts List
PL 9.1 1E% Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
PL 9.2 SDF/DSDF FEED ASSEMBLY ltem Part Description
1 2N1563 FEED ASSEMBLY TOP COVER (USO/XCL)
- 21\11 575 FEED ASSEMBLY TOP COVER
(XE) 2 14N331 PAD 3 - PAPER GATE SPRING
4 31 N161 ARM 5 - PAPER GATE
6 - SCREW (3x8)
7 140N5199 SDF SENSOR PWB (REP 5.16) 8 152N1656 SDF SENSOR HARNESS 9 120N284 SET DETECT ACTUATOR 10 120N285 SENSOR ACTUATOR 11 121N410 SDF FEED SOLENOID (SOL 1)
(REP 5.17) 12 - SCREW (3x4) SCREW (3x6)
(XD155DF) 13 31N160 SOLENOID ARM 14 9N1009 SPRING - 9N1037 SPRING(DUPLEX)(XD~~~DF) 15 - E RING 16 7N738 CLUTCH GEAR (REP 5.18)
(DUPLEX) 17 16N176 CLUTCH SLEEVE (REP 5.18) 18 9E57580 CLUTCH SPRING (REP 5.1 8) 19 - CAM BOSS (REP 5.18) 20 16E9640 BUSHING 21 6N892 CLUTCH SHAFT 22 9N1031 TENSION SPRING 23 20N464 2OMXE PULLEY 24 - E RING 25 9N1036 CLUTCH PAWL SPRING 26 7N739 CLUTCH PAWL 27 22N977 RETARD PAD(DUPLEX) (REP
5.19) 28 7E29490 GEAR (1 6T) 29 - SPRING PIN 30 - GEAR (20T) 31 5E10560 FEED ROLLER (REP 5.19) 32 6N891 FEED SHAFT 33 9N1012 SPRING 34 31N162 ARM 35 IN280 LOWER COVER 36 - SDF FEED ASSEMBLY (REP 5.22)
Reissue 4/00 Parts List
Workcenter XD Series 5-39 PL 9.2
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
PL 9.3 SBF TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY Item Part Description
1 - DOCUMENT GUIDE
2 - SCREW (3x8) 3 - SCREW 4 - GEAR (27T)
5 - DRIVE ARM 6 - SCREW (3x4)
7 127N988 SDF DRIVE MOTOR (MOT 1 ) (REP 5.7)
8 - GROUND WIRE
9 - SDF HARNESS
10 - TIE WRAP 11 9N1071 SPRING 12 - DRIVE FRAME 13 - E RING 14 - WASHER 15 - DRIVE BELT (83MXE4.8) 16 - GEAR (48Tl15T) 17 - SPRING PIN (2-9) 18 - BEARING 19 - BEARING 20 1 N281 REAR FRAME 2 1 - RETARD PAD 22 15N298 PRESSURE PLATE 23 - PRESSURE SPRING 24 - FEED ASSEMBLY LATCH 25 38E13480 PAD 26 - PULLEY 27 - TRANSPORT DRIVE BELT (REP
5.6) 28 - PAPER ADVANCE KNOB 29 - EXIT GUIDE SPRING 30 - SDF DOCUMENT TRANSPORT 31 130N854 SDF DOCUMENT PATH SENSOR
(Q3) (REP 5.8) 32 22N979 ROLLER, EXIT 33 - DISCHARGE BRUSH 34 - DOCUMENT GUIDE 35 38N261 REFLECTOR 36 22N978 TRANSPORT ROLLER (DUPLEX) 37 2N1573 SDF FRONT COVER (XD103F,
XD120F) (XE) - - SDF FRONT COVER
38 - SDF REAR COVER
Parls List
PL 9.3 Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
PL 9.4 SDF/DSDF TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY (XD155DF=/XD130DF) item Part Description
1 38E13480 PAD 2 - RETARD PAD 3 15N298 PRESSURE PLATE 4 - PRESSURE SPRING 5 - UPPER PAPER GUIDE 6 22N1001 DSDF EXIT ROLLER
(DUPLEX)(REP 5.25) 7 - DISCHARGE BRUSH 8 - LOWER PAPER GUIDE 9 - SCREW (3x8) 10 - DOCUMENT GUIDE 11 - SDF HARNESS 12 - SCREW (3x6) 13 127N988 SDF DRIVE MOTOR (MOT1) (REP
5.20) I 4 - PAD 15 121 N420 DSDF EXIT ROLL SOLENOID
(SOL2) (DUPLEX)(REP 5.24) 16 - TIE WRAP 17 - DRIVE FRAME 18 - SCREW (3x4) 19 - SCREW (3x5) 20 - E-RING 2 1 - WASHER 22 - DRIVE BELT 23 - GEAR (48T115T) 24 - SPRING PIN 25 - BEARING 26 - GEAR (30T) 27 - BEARING 28 121 N418 DSDF TRANSPORT ROLL
CLUTCH (CLl)(DUPLEX) (REP 5.31)
29 - E RING 30 - BRACKET 31 - OPEN & SHUT LOCK SPRING 32 - SCREW (3x12) 33 - Y 22MXE PULLEY 34 - TRANSPORT DRIVE BELT 35 - PAPER RELEASE KNOB 36 - EXIT GUIDE SPRING 37 130N854 SDF DOCUMENT PATH SENSOR
(Q3) (REP 5.21) 38 - SDF DOCUMENT TRANSPORT 39 - DUPLEX GATE 40 22N1000 DUPLEX TRANSPORT ROLLER
(DUPLEX)(REP 5.27) 41 - DOCUMENT GUIDE 42 - REFLECTOR 43 22N978 TRANSPORT ROLLER (REP 5.26) 44 - SLEEVE 45 - TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY (REP
5.23) (PI0 PL 9.1 A Item 32)
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Parts List
PL 9.4
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Part Number index Table 1 Part Number Index
Parts List 4/80 Reissue
Part Number index 5-42 Workcenter XD Series
Table 1 Part Number lndex Table 1 Part Number lndex
Bart Number Part List
31N167 PL 6.2
38N230 PL 6.2
38N254 PL 9.1 B
38N261 PL 9.3
38N273 PL 9.1 A
38N274 PL 1.1
38N275 PL 1 .1
38N278 PL 9.1 8
38N279 PL 9.1B
38E13480 PL 5.1
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Parts List
Part Number lndex
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Table 1 Pala Number lndex
.
140N5412 PL 7.1 B
140N5413 PL 7.1 B
140N5415 PL 7.1 B
140N5473 PL 7.1 8
140N5474 PL 7.1 B
140N5475 PL71B
140N5500 PL71B
140N5641 PL 1.3
152N1622 PL 7.2
I 152N1623 PL 2.1
PL 7.1A
fable 1 Part Nurnber lndex
Parts List
Part Number lndex
Part Number
90N140
90N144
1 103N206
108E3660
108E5330
11 ON783
Reissue
Workcenter XD Series
Part List
PL 1.1
PL 1 .1
PL 6.1
PL 7.1 A
PL 7.1A
PL 5.3
Table 1 Part Number lndex
Reissue 4/00 Parts List
Workcenter XD Series 5-45 Part Number Index
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
6 General Pracedures Diagnostics
EnteringIExiting Diagnostics ................................................................................... Input Codes ................................................................................................................... Output Codes .............................. ......... ........................................................................... Counter Data Codes ..................................................................................................... Counter Reset Codes .......................... ......... ................................................................... Displaying Status Subcode ............................................................................................. Status Code Clear ......................... .. .......................................................................... Initializing the CopierIPrinter ........................................................................................... Adjustment Codes ......................................................................................................... Configuration Codes ....................................................................................................... Total Copy Count Read ....................... .. .....................................................................
... Drum Cartridge Count Read ........................... .. .......................................................... Drum Cartridge Count Clear ........................................................................................... GP1 Image on Photoreceptor ...................... .... .........................................................
User Simulation Mode Programmable Settings ................ .. .............................................................................
Product Specifications Physical Characteristics .................................................................................................. Installation Space Requirements .................................................................................... Electrical Requirements ..................... ...... ................................................................ CopierIPrinter Specifications ........................... .. .........................................................
Supplemental Tools and Supplies Supplemental Tools and Supplies ...................................................................................
Lot Number ldentification Lot Number Identification ...................... .. .....................................................................
General Service Notes General Service Notes ................................................................................................... Glossary of Terms ............................... .... ........................................................................ Notes: ..............................................................................................................................
Workcentre XD SERIES
General Procedures
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
General Procedures
Workcentre XD SERIES
EnteringIExiting Diagnostics 1. Switch on the power.
NOTE: Step 2 must be performed within 4 seconds to enter diagnostics.
2 Press the Clear button, press the lmage Quality button, press the Clear button, and press the lmage Quality button.
a. All lamps on the Control Console will go out.
b. The copy count display will become blank.
3. Using the Copy Quantity button(s), select the number that corresponds to the desired diagnostic test.
4. Press Start. 5. Using the Copy Quantity button(s), select the number that corresponds to the desired
subcode.
a. Pressing the Copy Quantity "ones" button increases the count by one. Pressing the Copy Count "tens" button increases the count by 10.
b. Pressing and holding the %button while pressing the Copy Quantity "ones" button will decrease the count by one. Pressing and holding the % button while pressing the Copy Quantity "tens" button will decrease the count by 10.
6. Press the Start button.
NOTE: When exiting diagnostics, the number of times Clear needs to be pressed depends on the diagnostic code that is entered.
7. To exit diagnostics, either switch the power off, then on, or press the Clear button until the Ready LED illuminates and a copy quantity of 1 appears in the Copy Quantity display.
Input Codes An lnput Code is entered to check the operation of a sensor or a switch. Enter the code for the component. Manually actuate the component while observing the appropriate lamp on the Control Console. Testing input components requires that the lamps on the Control Console function correctly.
Workcentre XD SERIES
Table 1 lnput Codes
General Procedures
EnteringIExiting Diagnostics, lnput Codes
Code 2-[02]
30-[01]
30-[01]
30-[01]
30-[01]
30-[OI]
Input Component
SDF Sensor Status Set Detect Sensor Document Path Sensor Document Cover Closed Sensor Position Sensor
Paper Feed Sensor Q1
Fuser Jam Sensor Q2
Paper Exit Sensor Q3
Bypass Tray Paper Sensor
New Drum Cartridge Sensor
Control Console Lamp
Toner Cartridge LED Paper Jam LED Drum Cartridge LED SDF Jam LED
Toner Cartridge LED
Paper Jam LED
Drum cartridge LED
Image Quality Auto LED
RIE LED
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Output Codes Enter an Output Code to check the operation of an output component (clutch, motor, solenoid etc.) or to output the Grid Bias, Transfer Corotron, or Developer Bias voltage.
Table 1 Output Codes
Code
1-[Ol]
2-[03]
2-[04]
2-[05]
2-[06]
2-[07]
5-[OI]
Output Component
Scan Drive Motor MOT2
SDF Drive Motor MOT1
5-[02]
5-[03]
6-[OI]
6-[02]
8-[06]
Description
The optics will scan at a speed that corresponds to the selected magnification when the Start button is pressed. The Drum Cartridge LED will illuminate when the Scan Home sensor is in the home position.
The SDF Motor operates for 10 seconds at a speed
SDF Feed Solenoid SOLl
DSDF Pinch Roll Solenoid SOL2
DSDF Exit Roll Clutch CLl
DSDF Deflection Gate Solenoid SOL3
Control Console LED
10
Table 1 Output Codes
that corresponds to the current magnification.
The SDF Paper Feed Solenoid cycles 20 times between On (500 ms) and Off (500 ms) when the Start Button is pressed.
The DSDF Exit Pinch Roll Solenoid SOL2 cycles 20 times between On (500 ms) and Off (500 ms) when the Start Button is pressed.
The DSDF Exit Roll Clutch CL1 cycles 20 times between engaged (500 ms) and disengaged (500 ms) when the Start button is pressed.
The DSDF Deflection Gate Solenoid SOL3 cycles 20 times between On (500 ms) and Off (500 ms) when the Start Button is pressed.
The LEDs on the Control Console will illuminate for check
Heat Rod HTRl and Exhaust Fan MOT3
Exposure Lamp
Paper Feed Solenoid SOLl (Tray I ) , Paper Feed Solenoid SOL2 (Tray 2), Alternate Tray Feed Solenoid
Registration Roller Sole- noid check
Transfer Corotron Voltage
General Procedures
Output Codes
25-[OI]
25-[lo]
61-[03]
64-[Ol]
five seconds when the Start button is pressed.
The heat rod will pulse on five times each time the Start button is pressed. The Exhaust Fan will rotate in the high speed mode.
The exposure lamp will illuminate for five seconds each time the Start button is pressed.
The paper feed solenoid for the selected paper tray will cycle on and off 20 times when the Start button is pressed.
The registration roller solenoid will cycle on and off 20 times when the Start button is pressed.
When the Start button is pressed, the Transfer Corotron output is present for 30 seconds. This measurement is made at the Transfer Corotron Plate with the Side Door open and the Side Door Interlock Switch (S3lS4) actuated.
Toner Motor MOT4
Description Code
Voltage: +I200 VDC (not under load)
The toner motor will operate for 30 seconds when the Start button is pressed.
Output Component
Main Drive Motor and Developer Bias Voltage
Polygon Motor operation check
Polygon Motor (HSYNC output) check
Internal Test Pattern
The main motor will operate for 30 seconds when the Start button is pressed. The Developer Bias Voltage, Charge Corotron volt- age, and Grid Bias voltage will also be present for 30 seconds if the Toner Cartridge is installed.
The polygon motor operates for 30 seconds when the Start button is pressed.
HSYNC is performed and the Polygon Motor is run for 30 seconds when the Start button is pressed. Fault Code E7-03 Laser Problem will set when the control logic fails to detect HSYNC.
The copierlprinter produces a solid grey test print when the Start button is pressed.
Counter Data Codes
Table 1 Counter Data Codes
Code 1 Copier Counter Data I
22-[05] /Total Copies
The copy count will flash 3 digits at a time, 2 times (6 digits) 000 3 234 (Example shows a copy count of 234.)
he drum cartridge count will flash 3 digits at a time. 2 times (6 digits).
22-[I 21
The display will pause about 2 seconds between counts.
Drum Cartridge Count Check
The scanner counter value will flash 3 digits at a time, 2 times (6 digits).
22-[I 41
22-[21]
I / 000 -t 234 (Example shows a scanner count of 234.) I
000 -t 234 (Example shows a drum cartridge count of 234.)
The PROM version is displayed as 3 digits when the Start button is pressed.
Scanner Counter Check
Counter Reset Codes A code is entered to reset or disable drum count data.
Table 1 Counter Reset Codes
Scanner Counter Clear When Start is pressed, the scanner counter value is reset to 000-000.
Code
24-[07]
Workcentre XD SERIES
Copier Counter Data
Drum Cartridge Count Clear When Start is pressed, the drum copy count will reset to 000-000.
General Procedures
Counter Data Codes, Counter Reset Codes
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Displaying Status Subcode Status Code Clear
/ 14 I Status Code Clear - Codes other than U2
If a status code which is displayed is associated with more than one subcodes, press the Start A code is entered to clear a U 2 or other status code. button to vlew the subcode.
Table 1 Status Code Clear Codes
Code
General Procedures
Displaying Status Subcode, Status Code Clear
Status Code
16
Workcentre XD SERIES
When Start IS pressed, Status codes other than U2 will be cleared
U2 Status Code Clear When Start 1s pressed, a U 2 Status code w~l l be cleared
initializing the CopierlPrinler CWkBTtlON
Changes lo the factory default sell~ngs wbtch exist pnor lo iniiiaiization will be lost twhen the copieriprinler ~nitiaiizes Check and record aii Configuration Codes Adjustment Codes and Prograwmahie Selbngs Features before inifiairzing the c~pier/~oiinier
NOTE: When diagnosis indicates that the Main PWB may require replacement, initialize the copier/printer before changing the Main PWB. Operate the copier/printer after completing the initialization process to determine if the problem still exists.
1. Enter the d~agnost~c mode and check all Conf~gurat~on Codes, Adjustment Codes and Programmable Settlngs Features. Record all settlngs whlch are drfferent than the factory default settrngs.
2. Ex~t the d~agnost~cs mode.
3. Initialize the copierlprinter.
a. Ensure that the Preset Reduclion/Enlargement LED is set to the 100% setting.
b. Perform the following within four seconds:
press the Clear button
press the I mage Quality button
press the Clear button again
press the Preset ReductionlEnlargement button
The display will go blank.
c. Enter the Initialization Code 88-[I] and press the Start button.
The copieriprinter will initialize and resume operation in the Ready mode.
4. Enter the diagnostic mode and re-enter all of the Adjustment Codes and Configuration Codes which were programmed prior to initialization.
5. Re-enter the Programmable Features Settings which were present prior to initialization and then press the Clear button to resume normal machine operation.
Workcentre XD SERIES
General Procedures
initializing the Copierllarinter
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Adjustment Codes A code is entered to perform an adjustment.
Code 1 unction 1 Range
(High mode)
and Developer Bias Voltage
-400 to -450 VDC
-380 +I- 20 VDC
26-[43] 1 Side Edge Erase 10 to 5.0 mm
Table 1 Adjustment Codes
The Developer Bias Voltage, Charge Corotron voltage, and Grid Bias voltage will also be present for 30 seconds if the Toner Cartridge is installed.
Default ADJ
ADJ 9.2
ADJ 9.2
ADJ 9.1
Description
NOTE: Check that the Grid Bias Voltage (Low mode) 8-[3] is within range before checking and/or adjusting the Grid Bias Voltage (High mode).
When the Start button is pressed, the Charge Corotron output is present in the High Mode for 30 seconds. When the Start button is pressed, the Charge Corotron output is present in the Low Mode for 30 seconds.
The main motor will operate for 30 seconds when the Start button is pressed.
Code Erase Amount (mm) 0=0 mm 1=0.5 mm 2=1.0 mm 3=1.5 mm 4=2.0 mm (default) 5=2.5 mm 6=3.0 mm 7=3.5 mm 8=4.0 mm 9=4.5 mm 10=5.0 mm
2.0 mm
If the Toner Cartridge is removed before this code is entered, only the Main Motor is energized.
When the Start button is pressed, the code number for the side edge erase amount is displayed.
Code Temperature (Degrees C) 0=175 1 =I80 2=185 3=190 default (all models except XD130df and XD155df) 4=195 default (XD130df and XD155df) 5=200
190°C
To change the fuser temperature, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button to select the code for the desired temperature and then press the Start button.
To change the side edge erase amount, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button.
When the Start button is pressed, the code number for the fuser temperature is displayed.
General Procedures
Adjustment Codes Workcentre XD SERIES
Table 1 Adiustment Codes
Range Default ADJ Description
155 to1 80% 165°C When the Start button is pressed, the code number for the multi-copy fusing temperature is dis- played.
NOTE: To reduce heat build up in the machine during jobs of 20 copies or more, the fusing temper- ature is lowered to the selected value in the list below when the twentieth copy is reached.
Code Temperature (Degrees C) 0=155 1=160 2=165 default (all models except XDI 30df and XD155df) 3=170 default (XDI 30df and XD155df) 4=175 5=180
To change the multi-copy fusing temperature, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button to select the code for the desired temperature and then press the Start button.
When the Start button is pressed, the code number for the current duplex copying fusing temper- ature shift is displayed.
NOTE: The temperature shift which is selected is added to the currently selected Fuser Tempera- ture (refer to Adjustment Code 43-[I]).
Code Temperature (Degrees C) o=+/-0 1 =-8 2=-6 3=-4 4=-2 5=+/-0 6=+2 7=+4 8=+6 9=+8
To change the duplex copying fusing temperature, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button to select the code for the desired temperature shift and then press the Start button.
WorkCentre XD SERIES
General Procedures
Adjustment Codes
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Table 1 Adjustment Codes
Ixposure Adjust- nent
mage Magnifica- ion (Front to Rear) Zdjustment: Zutomatic
mage Magnifica- ion (Front to Rear) Zdjustment: vlanual
mage Magnifica- ion (Lead Edge to rrail Edge)
-ead Edge 3eletion
lange 1 Default
lmage Quality Mode I Illuminated LED Auto Auto mode LED Text Text mode LED Photo Photo mode LED Toner Save Toner Save LED
LDJ
\DJ 6.l
To change an exposure setting value, press the Copy Quantity buttons until the desired settin!: appears in the Copy Quantity display.
Description
When the Start button is pressed, the exposure setting for Auto mode is displayed. To view the settings for the other modes, press the lmage Quality button until the appropriate LED or LED illuminate.
iDJ 6.8
To change magnification, press the Copy Quantity buttons. lncreasing the number increases tl magnification. Decreasing the number decreases the magnification.
Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting or settings.
Press the Image Quality button until only the Auto lamp is lit, then press the Start button. The machine scans the reference line on the calibration strip, calculates the correct magnificatic and automatically adjusts the setting. The adjusted setting appears in the Quantity display.
iDJ 6.8
Press the Clear button to exit the mode.
Press the Image Quality button until only the Text lamp is lit. The current setting is displayed i the Quantity display.
To change magnification, press the Copy Quantity buttons. lncreasing the number increases tl magnification. Decreasing the number decreases the magnification.
iDJ 6.8
I Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting
Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting.
Press the Image Quality button until only the Photo lamp is lit. The scan speed is adjusted.
To change Lead Edge Deletion, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shift of 0.1 mm.
\DJ 8.2
To decrease the lead edge deletion, decrease the number. To increase the lead edge deletion, increase the number.
Press the image Quality button until only the Text lamp is lit. The Lead Edge Deletion setting is displayed.
I Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting.
General Procedures
Adjustment Gsdes
Table 1 Adiustment Codes
50-[Ol] Lead Edge Regis- - Code
50-[Ol]
tration (Scan Start Timing)
This setting affects the Scan ON sig- nal timing.
Function
Trail Edge Deletion
To change Trail Edge Deletion, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shift of 0.1 mm.
To decrease the trail edge deletion, decrease the number. To increase the trail edge deletion, increase the number.
Range
00 to 99
Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting.
Press the lmage Quality button until only the Photo lamp is lit. The Lead Edge Registration (Scan Start Timing) setting is displayed.
To change the timing of the Scan ON signal, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shift of 0.1 mm.
Default
50
To decrease the distance between the image and the lead edge of the paper, enter a higher num- ber. This action causes the scan to start sooner. To increase the distance between the image and the lead edge of the paper, enter a smaller num- ber. This action delays the scan.
ADJ
ADJ 8.3
This setting affects the Registration Roller ON timing.
Description
Press the Image Quality button until the Auto, Text, and Photo lamps are lit. The Trail Edge Deletion setting is displayed.
50-[Ol]
Edge Registration (Scan Start Tim-
This setting affects the Scan ON sig- nal timing when copies are made from the SDFI DSDF.
Lead Edge Registration
To change the Lead Edge Registration, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 pro- duces a shift of 0.1 mm.
To decrease the distance between the image and the lead edge of the paper, enter a higher num- ber. To increase the distance between the lead edge and the image, enter a lower number.
00 to 99
Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto and Text lamps are lit. The SDFIDSDF Lead Edge Registration setting is displayed.
50
ADJ 8.5
(To change the setting, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shin of 0.1 (
Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting.
NOTE: Power the copier/printer off and then on before making the SDF/DSDF Lead Edge Regis- tration adjustment. Make the adjustment immediately after turning on the power.
To move the image toward the lead edge of the paper, enter a lower number. To move the image away from the lead edge of the paper, enter a higher number.
ADJ 8.4
Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting.
Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting.
Press the Image Quality button until only the Auto lamp is lit. The Lead Edge Registration setting is displayed.
Workcentre XD SERIES
General Procedures
Adjustment Codes
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Code
50-[I 01
Paper Tray Bypass (XDlOO/XD102/ XD103flXD120fl
50-[I 01
Function
Center Offset Adjustment:
Alternate Paper Tray (XD104/XD105f/ XDl30df/XD155df)
Paper Tray1 and Paper Tray 2
Center Offset Adjustment:
50-[lo]
Range
00 to 99
00 to 99
(XDl 03f/XD105f/ XD120f/XD125f/ XD130df/XD155df)
Default
50
Center Offset Adjustment: Print Position
Table I Adjustment Codes
ADJ Description 1
00 to 99
50-[I 01
Paper Tray 1 : Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto and Paper Tray 1 lamps are lit. Paper Tray 2: Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto and Paper Tray 2 lamps are lit.
00 to 99 Center Offset Adjustment: Scan from SDFJDSDF
1 The Center Offset setting is displayed. I
50
To change the Center Offset setting, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shift of 0.1 mm.
To shift the image toward the front of the machine, increase the number. To shift the image toward the rear of the machine, decrease the number.
Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting.
Press the lmage Quality button until only the Auto lamp is lit. The Center Offset setting is displayed.
I I To change the Center Offset setting, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shift of 0.1 mm.
To shift the image toward the front of the machine, increase the number. To shift the image toward the rear of the machine, decrease the number.
Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting.
Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto and Alternate Tray lamps are lit. The Center Offset setting is displayed.
I I To change the Center Offset setting, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shift of 0.1 mm.
To shift the image toward the front of the machine, increase the number. To shift the image toward the rear of the machine, decrease the number.
Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting.
Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto, Text and Photo lamps are lit. The Center Offset setting is displayed.
To change the Center Offset setting, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shift of 0.1 mm.
I I To shift the image toward the front of the machine, decrease the number. To shift the image toward the rear of the machine, increase the number.
1 /Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting. I
General Procedures
Adjustment Codes Workcentre XD SERIES
Table 1 Adjustment Codes
Adjustment: Scan
Scan from Docu- ment Glass
Buckle: Paper Tray Bypass
il -[02] Registration Buckle: Paper Tray 1 and1 or Paper Tray 2
Zange
)O to 99
51-[02] Registration Buckle: Alternate Paper Tray (XD104/XD105fl XD130dflXDI 55df)
To change the Center Offset setting, press the Copy Quantity buttons. An increase of 1 produces a shift of 0.1 mm.
IDJ
To shift the image toward the front of the machine, decrease the number. To shift the image toward the rear of the machine, increase the number.
Description
Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto and Text lamps are lit. The Center Offset setting is displayed.
Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting
Paper Tray 1 : Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto and Paper Tray 1 lamps are lit. Paper Tray 2: Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto and Paper Tray 2 lamps are lit.
The setting for the selected Paper Tray is displayed in the Copy Quantity display and the LED for the selected magnification is lit.
To change the setting, select the desired magnification, then press the Copy Quantity buttons. To increase the buckle, increase the number. To decrease the buckle, decrease the number.
I Press the Clear button to exit and store the new seiting(s).
Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto lamp flashes. The Paper Tray setting is displayed in the Copy Quantity display and the LED for the selected magnification is lit.
To change the setting, select the desired magnification, then press the Copy Quantity buttons.
To increase the buckle, increase the number. To decrease the buckle, decrease the number.
Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting(s).
Press the lmage Quality button until the Auto and Alternate Paper Tray lamps are lit. The Alternate Paper Tray setting is displayed in the Copy Quantity display and the LED for the selected magnification is lit.
To change the setting, select the desired magnification, then press the Copy Quantity buttons.
To increase the buckle, increase the number. To decrease the buckle, decrease the number.
Press the Clear button to exit and store the new setting(s).
4/00 General Procedures
Workcentre XD SERIES 6-1 3 Adjustment Codes
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Table 1 Adjustment Codes
1 Function /Range /Default
(XDI 03f/XD105f/ XDl 2OflXD125fl
SDFIDSDF 00 to 99 Exposure Correc- tion
50
If the copy output is acceptable when copies are run from the Document Glass but is consistently either too light or too dark when run from the SDF, make the appropriate adjustment below:
ADJ
Increase the setting to obtain darker copy output. Decrease the number to obtain lighter copy output
Description
The current setting for SDF Exposure is displayed when this diagnostic code is entered.
To change the setting, press the copy quantity buttons until the new value is displayed, then press the Start button. The new value is stored and a copy is made. If necessary, repeat the process until the output has the desired density.
I I Press the Clear button to store the setting and exit the Diagnostic mode.
General Procedures
Adjustment Codes Workcentre XD SERIES
Configuration Codes CAUTION
The correct selbngs for the machine being serviced can be deferm~ned from the informahon tn ihe Descnpt~on column ~n Table 1
These codes allow the d~splay~ng or chang~ng of varlous mach~ne conf~gurat~ons
4/00 General Procedures
Workcentre XD SERIES 6-1 5 Configuration Codes
Codes
Description
When the Start button is pressed after entering 22-[14], the P-ROM version displays as three digits on the Copy Quantity display.
When the Start button is pressed after entering 26-[Ol], the current tray configuration (0 or 1) is displayed:
0 = Single sheet bypass 1 = Alternate Tray
To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button.
When the Start button is pressed after entering 26-[02], the current SDF configuration (0, 1 or 2) is displayed:
0 = Without SDF 1 =With SDF 2 = Not available
To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button.
When the Start button is pressed after entering 26-[03], the current Paper Tray 2 configu- ration (0 or 1) is displayed:
0 = Without Paper tray 2 1 = With Paper tray 2
To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button.
When the Start button is pressed after entering 26-[04], the current duplex code number (0 or 1) is displayed:
0 =Without Duplex 1 = With Duplex
To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button.
Table I Configuration
ADJ Code
22-[I 41
26-[OI]
26-[02]
26-[03]
26-[04]
Range
-
0 or 1
O o r l o r2
0 or 1
0 or 1
Function
P-ROM version
Tray Configuration
SDF Setting
Paper Tray 2 set- ting
Duplex setting
Default
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Table 1 Configuration Codes
Function
Paper size config ration
Copy rate
Trail edge deletio
CE mark applica- tion
Drum cartridge lii end
Memory capacity (Main PWB)
0, 12, 15 cprr
ADJ 1 Description
When the Start button is pressed after entering 26-[06], the current paper size configura- tion (0, 1 or 2) is displayed:
0 = Inch series 1 = AB series 2 = Japan AB Series
To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button.
When the Start button is pressed, the machine copy rate is displayed. This setting cannot be changed from the Control Panel. To determine the copy rate for the machine, refer to the section CopierIPrinter Specifications, Table 1. When 26-[20] is entered, the currently active code number (0 or I ) is displayed:
0 = Trail edge deletion is allowed 1 = Trail edge deletion is not allowed
To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button.
When 26-[30] is entered, the currently active code number (0 or 1) is displayed:
0 = CE mark application control off 1 = CE mark application control on
To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button.
When 26-[38] is entered, the currently active code number (0 or 1) is displayed:
0 = End of life disabled 1 = End of life enabled
To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button.
When 26-[39] is entered, the currently active code number (0, 1 or 2) is displayed:
NOTE: Some early production XDlPOf machines were built with 6 MBytes of memory, not the 4 MBytes that is standard for the XD120f. On these early machines, the Memory Capacity configuration code will appear as "2,"and the machine will operate normally. If the GDI Memory Board on an XD120f is replaced, reset this configuration code to "I."
0 = No memory 1 = 4 Mbyte (all WorkCentre XD Series models except XD155df and XD130df) 2 = 6 Mbyte (XD130df and XD155df) See Note below.
To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button.
General Procedures
Configuration Codes WorkCentre XD SERIES
Table 1 Configuration Codes
Code
26-[40] Polygon motor off 10, 1, 2, 3
Function
O=Oseconds 1 = 30 seconds 2 = 60 seconds 3=90seconds
LDJ Range
To change the configuration, press the Copy Quantity "ones" button until the desired code is displayed, then press the Start button.
Description
When 26-[40] is entered, the currently active code number (0, 1, 2 or 3) is displayed:
Default
4/00 General Procedures
Workcentre XD SERIES 6-1 7 Configuration Codes
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Total Copy Count Read Drum Cartridge Count Read 1. Enter diagnostics. 1.
2. Record the total copy count. 2.
a. Enter code 22-[05].
b. The copy count will flash 3 digits at a time, 2 times (6 digits), then repeat the sequence indefinitely. The most significant digits will flash first.
For example, 000 + 234 (example shows a Copy count of 234.)
c. The display will pause about 1 second between counts.
3. To end the copy count read, press the Clear button. 3.
Enter dlagnostlcs
Record the drum cartr~dge copy count
a Enter code 22-[12]
b The drum count w~l l flash 3 d~glts at a t~me, 1 t~mes (6 d~g~ts), then repeat the sequence ~ndefln~tely The most s~gn~flcant d~g~ t s will flash flrst
For example, 000 + 234 (example shows a drum count of 234 )
c The dlsplay w~l l pause about 1 second between counts
To end the drum count read, press the Clear button
General Procedures 4/00 Total Copy Count Read, Drum Cartridge Count Read 6-1 8 Workcentre XD SERIES
Drum Cartridge Count Clear 1 Enter diagnost~cs.
2. Enter code 24-[07].
3. Press the Start button.
4. The drum cartridge count will reset to 0.
5. Exit diagnostics.
GP1 Image on Photoreceptor 1. Open the document cover and prepare the copier to make a copy of Side €3 of the Stan-
dard Test Pattern (82P524).
2. Leaving the document cover open, press the Start button. (The carriage will begin to scan.) Open the copier or turn off the power when the carriage reaches the center. This will cause a paper jam.
3. Clear the paper jam, being careful not to disturb the image on the photoreceptor.
4. Observe the image on the photoreceptor.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 two more times, or as required.
Workcentre XD SERIES
- - - - - - - - - -
General Procedures
Drum Cartridge Count Clear, GP1
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Programmable Settings Features 0-9 & 11-19 To change a programmable setting, refer to Table I.
NOTE: Programmable features can only be accessed while the copier is in the Ready mode.
1. Press the lmage Quality button until the Toner Save LED illuminates.
2. Press the lmage Quality button again and hold it for 4 to 6 seconds.
The Auto LED illuminates and the three red LEDs (Jam, Toner Cartridge indicator, Photo- receptor) flash.
3. Press the Copy Quantity "10's" button to select the program number of the feature to be changed.
NOTE: You will not be given the choice to change an option i f the copier is not equipped with the feature.
4. Press the Start button.
The current setting for the program will flash.
5. Press the l's-unit button until the desired option number is displayed.
6. Press the Start button to store the selection.
7. Press the Clear button to continue making other changes, or press the lmage Quality button to return to Ready mode.
Feature 10 To change the programmable feature, refer to Table 1.
NOTE: Programmable features can only be accessed while the copier is in the Ready mode.
1. Press the lmage Quality button until the Toner Save LED illuminates.
2. Press the lmage Quality button again and hold it for 4 to 6 seconds.
The Auto LED illuminates and the three red LEDs (Toner Cartridge, Drum Cartridge, Paper Jam) flash.
3. Press the "10's" button until the number 10 is displayed.
NOTE: You will not be given the choice to change an option i f the copier is not equipped with the feature.
4. Press the Start button.
The current reductionlenlargement setting will flash.
5. Press the Zoom-Up or Zoom-Down button until the desired percentage is displayed.
6. Press the Start button to store the selection.
7. Press the Clear button to make more changes or press the lmage Quality button to return to Ready mode.
Table 1 Programmable Features Settings
Table 1 Proarammable Features Settinas
Program Number
0
Program Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Program
Priority Tray (Models XD104/105f/130df/ 155df only)
Program
Auto Clear Time Out
Time-out to Power Save
Time-out to Power Shut-Off
Default Magnification
Default Exposure
Auto Contrast Adjustment
Paper Trail Edge Deletion (4 mm)
Option Number and Option
0 - Main paper tray 1 - Alternate paper tray
General Procedures
Programmable Settings
Option Number and Option
0 - Off 1 - 30 seconds 2 - 60 seconds (default) 3 - 90 seconds 4 - 120 seconds
0 -Off 1 - 45 seconds 2 - 90 seconds (default) 3 - 2 minutes 4 - 5 minutes
0 - 2 minutes 1 - 5 minutes (default) 2 - 15 minutes 3 - 30 minutes 4 - 60 minutes 5 - 120 minutes 6 - Off
0 - 100% (default) 1 - 99% 2 - 101%
0 - Auto Exposure (default) 1 - Text 2 - Photo 1
0 - Lightest 1 - Lighter 2 - Normal (default) 3 - Darker 4 - Darkest
0 - On (default) 1 - Off
8
9
9
10
11
Paper Tray Bypass Auto Start (Models XD 100/102/103f/120f/ 125f)
SDF Auto Start (Models XD103f/105f/120f/ 1255)
DSDF Auto Start (Models XD130dffiD155df)
RIE Preset
Auto Paper Tray Switching (Models XD104/105f/120f/ 130df/155df only)
0 - On (default) 1 - Off
0 - On (default) 1 - Off
0 -On 1 - Off (default)
50 - 200% 50% (default)
0 - On 1 - Off (default)
4/00 General Procedures
Workcentre XD SERIES 6-21 Programmable Settings
Table 1 Programmable Features Settings
Program Number
12
Program
SDFIDSDF Contrast Adjust- ment (Models XD103f/105f/120f/125f/ 13Odf/155df)
Option Number and Option
0 - l~ghtest 1 - I~ghter 2 - Normal (default) 3 - darker 4 - darkest
14 0 - 60 seconds (default) 1 - 90 seconds 2 - 120 seconds 3 - 150 seconds 4 - 180 seconds
- 16
17
Default copy paper
18
19
Drum Cartr~dge L~fe Rema~n~ng
Default I-s1ded/2-~1ded Mode (Model XD130dfLXD155df)
size for 2-sided copying from
Top Paper Tray Default (Models XD120f/XD13Odf/ XD 155df)
Lower Paper Tray Default (Models XDIZOf/XD13Odf/ XD 155df)
5 - Off - no t~me out
Percent (0-100)
0 - 1 to 1 default 1 - 1 to 2 2 - 2 t o 2 3 - 2 t 0 1
the document glass:
0 - 8 5 x 1 4 1 - 8 5 x 13 2 - 8 . 5 ~ 124 3 - A41 21 0 x 297mm 4 - 8.5 x 11 (default) 5 - 951 182x 257mm 6 - 5 . 5 ~ 8 5 7 - A51 148 x 210mm 8 - 941 257 x 364mm
0 - 8 5 x 1 4 1 - 8 5 x 13 2 -8.5 x 12 4 3 - A41 21 0 x 297mm 4 - 8.5 x 11 (default) 5 - 851 182x 257mm 6 - 5.5 x 8.5 7 - A51 148x210mm 8 - 941 257 x 364mm
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Physical Characteristics Installation Space Requirements
Table 1 Machine Dimensions
Machine Dimensions
XD100/ XD102
Width x Depth x Height
20.5 x 17.5 x 12 inches (51 8 x 445 x 304 mm)
XD104
XD103f/XD105f/XD125f
XDl20f/XDl3Odf/XDl55df
I XDI 3 0 d f / ~ ~ 1 5 5 d f 169.5 Ibs. (31.6 kg) I
30 Ox 1 7 5 x 12 inches (762 ~ 4 4 5 x 3 0 4 mm)
30 0 x 19.3 x 14.9 inches (762 x 491 x 379 mm)
30 0 x 19 3 x 18 3 inches (762 x 491 x 464 mm)
XD103f/XD105f/XDI 25f Figure 1 Physical Dimensions (XD100/XD102) 48.5 Ibs (22 kg)
Figure 2 Physical Dimensions (XD104)
Table 2 Machine Weight
General Procedures 4/00
Physical Characteristics, lnslallation Space Require- 6-22 Workcentre XD SERIES
Machine Weight
XDlOO/XD102/XD104
(includes Drum Cartridge and Toner Cartridge)
409Ibs(18.6kg)
Figure 3 Physical Dimensions (XDlOSfED105fEDI25f)
30.0" 1762 mm
Figure 4 Physical Dimensions (XD120fED13ODFED155df)
Figure 5 Minimum Clearances (All models)
Workcentre XD SERIES
General Procedures
installation Space Requirements
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Electrical Requirements GopieriPrinter Specif icalions
Percentages Preset: 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200, one customer settable Zoom: 50 - 200%
Table 1 Electrical Requirements Table 1 Specifications
I
Copy Paper (Tray 1 and Tray 2:
Electrical Requirements
Power Consumpt~on
12 cpm at 600 dpi, 8-112 x 11" (A4) and smaller, same size originals (XDI20f I XD125f)
Onglnal Slze
SDFIDSDF Capaclty
120 VAC +I- lo%, 50160 Hz, 15A
MAX 1 0 kW Standby 14 3 Watts Shut-off 5 Watts
Size and Weight
Copy Rate
13 cpm at 600 dpi, 8-112" x 11" (A4) and smaller, same size originals (XD130df)
Document Glass 10" x 14" maximum (54) SDF 1 DSDF 1 0 x 1 4 (B4) maxrmum
30 pages, 20 lbl80 gsm 16 Ib - 24 Ib (60 -90 gsm)
Copy Ratlo
5.5x8.5 1 A5 to 8.5~14" / 21 6x356mm 16-24 Ib / 60-90 gsrn Bypass Tray /Alternate Tray: 3.5x5.5" l89x140mm to 8.5~14" I 21 6x356mm 14-34 Ib 1 52-1 30 gsrn
10 cpm at 600 dpi, 8-112" x 1 I " (A4) and smaller, same size originals (XD1 00/XD1021XD103f/XD104/XD105f)
1.1 +I- 1%
IXD1O2
1200 sheets - 24 lb190 gsrn I
Print Rate
Paper Tray Capacity: XDlOO/XD103f/XD104 XD105f
15 cpm at 600 dpi, 8-112 x 11 I A4 and smaller, same size originals (XD155df)
8 ppm at 600 dpi with ECP parallel port communications enabled
250 sheets - 20 Ibl80 gsrn
XD120flXD130dfl XD155df
Tray 1 - 250 sheets, 20 lbl80 gsm; Tray 2 - 250 sheets, 20 lb180 gsm
Paper Tray Bypass: XD100/XD102/XD103fl XD120flXD125f
General Procedures 4/00 CopieriPrinter Specifications 6-24 Workcentre XD SERIES
1
Alternate Paper Tray: XD104lXD105fl XD130dflXD155df
First copy output time
Warm up time
50
9 seconds (warm) 23 seconds (cold) less than 23 seconds
4/00 General Procedures
Workcentre XD SERIES 6-25 CopierIPrinter Specifications
Table I Specifications
Restrictions: Paper Stock
Feed recycled paper, labels, or transparencies one sheet at a time. Use labels and transparencies which are specifically designed for copiers (high temperatures).
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Supplemental Tools and Supplies
Table 1 Tools
NASGIXCL - 43P45
General Procedures
Supplemental Tools and Supplies
Heavy-Duty Towels
Lens and Mirror Cleaner
Lint-Free Cloth
Oil
Service Log Pouch
Test Pattern
Supply Name
Toner Cartridge
Drum Cartridge
Workcentre XD SERIES
NASGIXCL - 35P3191
NASGIXCL - 43P81 or 43H12 XE - 8R901784
NASGIXCUXE - 60084372
NASGIXCL - 70P23 XE - 70P95
600K53510
82P524 (NASG and XCL) 82P523 (XE) 82P12130 (NASG)
Part Number
6R914 (NASG) 6R915 (XE)
13R551 (NASG) 13R552 (XE)
Table 2 Supplies
Lot Number Identification Drum Cartridge
Factory
I 00000000 V
Serial number Last digit of product~on year Production month
Figure 1 Drum Cartridge Lot Number Identification
Toner Cartridge
Destination
1 - Serial number Last digit of production year Production month
(1,2,3 ,... O,X,Y)
Figure 3 Toner Cartridge Lot Number Identification
Figure 2 Drum Cartridge Lot Number Label Location
Figure 4 Toner Cartridge Lot Number Label Location
Workcentre XD SERIES
General Procedures
Lot Number Identification
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
General Service Notes Workcentre XD Series Toner Cartridge Yield A small number of customers may complain that they are not getting 6000 copies from their toner cartridge.
The expected Toner Cartridge yield of 6000 copies is based on an average area coverage of six (6) percent per 8.5" X 11" (A4) copy. However, yield varies with area coverage of customer documents, document size, contrast setting, and percent of copies made with the document cover open. Therefore, the 6000 copies yield cannot be guaranteed.
It is important to understand that many of the customer's documents are greater than 6% area coverage. Any document which contains more area coverage than the samples represented in Figure I and Figure 2, will result in a yield of less than 6000 copies. Figure 3 and Figure 4 show examples of area coverage that exceeds 6 %.
1. l o colsade ~ e r c i s y r u n r g r a y llnei develop nearly 3% compirteiy $sack
/I"*, .
2 . m i l indicates me h g h conrrair whmsh may be obtained ~ , t h r h , ~ zype
O f deuelopmml.
3. However, the d e V v r t i o n of aowder i n any area i s .ooionlnaieiy
iieaal to the e l e c r i o r r v r c con t ras t b e t e e n t h a t area and ,ri oackgirund
4 . A black I l n P on a gray backqiovnd w I 1 reproduce as a denre l ine on a
c l e a r uri*giounJ b r i i v - r ormli i i u i c n i a l d i i s r e n r r r are developed.
5 - S v m m a r ~ z n g , w may r a y t h a t sarsade-r ' cre i i l~~+m xerography has rha
Pal iowlng characterliilcs.
5 . a . N a r r h l l n e r are o e v e i o ~ e d ro a denrlry ap~roxsmafely ~ i o ~ o r : ~ o ~ ~ l
SO the contrast between the line and (ti background density.
7 . i. Wide areas are developed a t the edges Lo aboui rhe ram degiea,
2nd are e r l e n t i a i l y vnderdeveloped i n t e r n a l l y .
3 . XerDcopiei made w i t h a developer having a h g h i r s b v e l e c i r i c diiieieiice
have less baskground and sharper, mare w l l def ined rhsracrerr o f m r e -
what 1-r d e n i t y rhan thore made w t h a developer having a ton rrlbo-
e l e c t r l s difference.
I. I f , however, the tr#boelecfr#c d f f e r e n c e ir too greaz, very i i t t i e
p h d e r d e p o s t l o n w i l l occur i n the Image areas and . washed-our p r i n t
will resuit.
(Text from xinoiRAPnr iooau, ,955 "?ho~e~ra~hir ~ n ~ ~ ~ ~ r r , ~ ~ , , )
Figure 1 Three percent coverage
S c c l l o n 5-24 Quarterly and inni la l iinanoiai repoifa
me .'i.r.s ...,, ': " C ilila,~* rhnii jieprrn car M. onyoi far sulmiss>on 1" t lnr snt,iit, i. t h e .ouna>1 r o m p l r l e r1nan- Elal repart= lor each giait.7, for enah fiscal year. and for
panod. --). be iEq"lred by the mayor T-r innvnl ilnancIa. =hn.l br prl,tld for dlslrlbutlan am moan '" pOrribis r h F .lose O f eaon : .roa1 ? a n a d
Sect lon 5-26 Various funds
Figure 2 Five percent coverage
General Procedures
General Service Notes Workcentre XD SERIES
- -
Figure 3 Eleven percent coverage
Wins Art Award BY ALEX
ThS blS*,"" A? L1_". -- P>Qh,".".,#".*O ..,,"L?,aq,.",. an a-am I" SL"nr"8' Dl*"* M "iv-i.,"r a' ax? Brlarr,, Wad Bealder m e nono, ,*nr ,*
b" %rn"l<,. l(. -.- a '" e., C"""l; *..r ,,"&* I/ sm-P --nn
Ciied as rcaran tor the a,"ard w U Dlu*.= rnCE", an* wmn r " w * i h t W-u-." Uri' -oiin ,"cil.P*I*n"an*.'n Ir,.r;-- I~,sur.b.".v:Vlsl,y. r ' - b , l , r .
01 *ai"iinp pan:a7mg ine era," stmepie 03 a g,.n, xnal* ," ,be m e mau2ng. Dimes rangp a, nn#*l,c talents was I1I- =een s +"?c,moae~ qsre"e ,a"**v~"*%
Cueis House Restored 8" ALICE
N*,",O" TheCllnr *n,,rP Ihcntcd 74
Hoooer Street, war Pr,Pno,"ely n v l ? a d ,* . '- r'lr"r ,",,. *); Src'"dar,Qeo- l,"rlrlrr.r,. an* wale, aemrgr "It ,he novae
"#"hnllib8e For one ,he hO,'.P *,.3 ,"S,d-C ." *"a a,, -, * (.*afl*" d l t*" O.".~d CU",lF. move, ,"S7 ms,. D.e="n, home," "lrwm o.-
Figure 4 Twenty-three percent coverage
General Procedures
General Service Notes Workcentre XD SERIES
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Glossary of Terms Table 1 Glossary of Acronyms and Terms
( ~ e r m (Description Table 1 Glossary of Acronyms and Terms
1 ~ e r m 1 Description I A3
A4
AC
FSMA
GDI
ACT
I A 0 1 Americas Operations I
Full Service Maintenance Agreement "Graphical Device Interface". Indicates that the device accepts data from a "PC
Paper size 297 millimeters (1 1.69 inches) x 420 millimeters (16.54 inches).
Paper size 210 millimeters (8.27 inches) x 297 millimeters (1 1.69 inches).
Alternatina Current is the t v ~ e of current available at the IJower source for the
AID
ADJ
lll',bI l l l 1 0 .
Advanced Customer Training: A course that teaches customers to perform some of the service that is normally performed by a Xerox Service Representative. . . Analog to Digital refers to a conversion of signal
Adjustment Procedure
GFD
ACO
Bit
CCD
HFSi
HVPS
America Customer Operations
Binary digit, either 1 or 0, representing an electrical state.
Charge Coupled Device (Photoelectric Converter)
CD
Chip
CRUM
CSE
CVT
DC
/sided originals.
using the "Windows" operating system. Windows will do the majority of the process- ing that enables a document to be printed and will send it to the printer for output.
Ground Fault Device
High Frequency Service Item
High Voltage Power Supply
Circuit Diagram
An Integrated Circuit (IC) (see Firmware)
Customer Replaceable Unit Monitor
Customer Service Engineer
Constant Velocity Transport used in the SDF to move the document at scanning speed when the optics remain stationary
Direct Current is the type of power the machine operates on. The machine converts
DMM
DRC
DSDF
-
AC power from the power source to DC power.
Digital Multimeter is a generic name for a meter that measures voltage, current, or electrical resistance and displays data in a digital display.
DeliveryIRigger Carrier
Duplex Set Document Feeder. A document feeder capable of handling single and 2
I EP 1 Environmental Partner
Duplex
EEA
EHIS
EME
Two sided copies
External Ethernet Adapter is used to connect the 2141212 DCIP to a network for access by more than one workstation.
Environmental Health and Safety
Electromagnetic Emissions are emitted from the machine during normal operation and the power of these emissions are reduced bv machine design features.
ESD
ESU
FIA
Electrostatic Discharge. A transfer of charge between bodies at different electro- static potential.
Electrostatic Set Up
Foreign Interface Accessory allows hardware such as a devise that accepts coins for
FIRM-
p PWB
OEM
OGM
PC
PCL
1 PCS
copies (Coin-Op) or a CopytronIAuditron (a devise that enables copying with a plug in key) to be connected to the 2141212. Using the 2141212 as a printer is not possible in these applications.
A Chip loaded with software identified by a date or revision.
Parts List
Part of (Assemblv Name)
Original equipment manufacturer
On-going Maintenance
Personal Computer
"Printer Control Language". An "HP developed printer control language. The com- puter or host will encode the imageldocument into PCL language. This information is sent to the printer where, the printer will do the majority of the processing as it decodes the information received and prints the image.
Publication Comment Sheet
Printed Wiring Board
Portable Work Station
Random Access Memory device. A digital memory circuit from which information can be accessed or where software information can be stored. RAM is its accepted name, but does not describe its function. A better name would be Readmrite Mem- ory, because the controller can read the information and it can write the information.
Repair Analysis Procedure for diagnosis of machine status codes and abnormal con. ditions
ReductionlEnlargement refers to features selection or components that enable reduction or enlargement
General Procedures
Glossary of Terms
Table 1 Glossary of Acronyms and Terms
Simplex I Single sided copies
TE /Trail Edge of the copy or print paper, with reference to definition of term LE
Term
REP
ROM
ROS
SAD
SDF
SCP
SEF
Self-test
SlMM
UM /Unscheduled Maintenance
Description
Repair Procedure for disassembly and reassembly of the component on the machine
Read Only Memory. A digital memory circuit that is designed to contain permanent software information. The name means that the controller on the PWB can only read the information from the ROM. The controller or any other device cannot change the values or send any software information to the ROM.
Raster Output Scanner - The devise that transfers the digitally processed image, using laser light, to the photoreceptor.
Solid Area Density
Set Document Feeder
Service Call Procedure
Short Edge Feed An automatic process that is used to check the Control Logic circuitry. Any fault that is detected during the self-test is displayed by a fault code or by LED'S on the PWB.
Single lnline Memory Module used in the Printer PWB to increase the printers print- ing capacity
XE 1 ~ e r o x Europe
XLA I Xerox Latin America
UI
US
W/
W/O
XBRA
XCL
Workcentre XD SERIES
User Interface
United States
With indicates a machine condition where the specified condition is present
Without indicates a machine condition where the specified condition is not present
Xerox Brasil
Xerox Canada Limited
General Procedures
Glossary of Terms
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Notes:
General Procedures 4/00 6-32 Workcentre XD SERIES
7 Wiring-Data PIugIJack Location ?ndex Plug 1 Jack Location Index ............................ .. ............................................................. 7-3
Plug / Jack Location Drawings ......................................................................................................... Power Supply PWB 7-5
Main PWB (Without SDF) .......................................................................................... 7-6 Main PWB (With SDF) ................................................................................................... 7-7
............................................................................................ Machine Frame Connectors 7-8
Block Schematic Diagrams 1 . 1 120 VAC Power Generation ..................................................................................... 7-10
.......................................................................... 1.2Power Generation and Distribution 7-11 2.1 Mode Selection ................... .... ............................................................................ 7-12 2.2 Mode Indication ......................................................................................................... 7-13
................................................................................................................. 4.1 Main Drive 7-14 5.1 SDF Document Feed .............................. .. ........................................................... 7-15 5.2 Duplex DSDF Components ....................................................................................... 7-16 6.1 Document Illumination ............................................................................................... 7-17 6.2 Scan Drive Control ................................................................................................... 6.3 Printer Input ............................................................................................................... 6.4 Image Processing ................................................................................................... 8.1 Paper Feed ............................................................................................................... 8.2 Paper Registration .................................................................................................. 8.3 Paper Tray Interlocks .................................... ... ......................................................... 9.1 Charge, Transfer and Detack ............. .. ............................................................... 9.2 Development .............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... 10.1 Fusing 10.2 Copy Exit ................................................................................................................
Workcentre XD SERIES Wiring-Data
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Wiring-Data
Workcentre XD SERIES
Plug / Jack Location index
Table 1
PI$ no. LOCATION
CNI
CN2
CN5
CN6
CNlO
CN11
CNlOl
CN101
CN102
CN102
CN103
CN103
CN104
CN105
CN106
CN107
CN108
CNlO9
CNl10
CN111
CN112
CN113
CN114
CN115
CN116
CN117
CN118
CN119
CN120
CN121
CN122
On Power supply PWB
On Power supply PWB
On Power supply PWB
On Power supply PWB
On Power supply PWB
On Power supply PWB
On Power supply PWB
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (With SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (With SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
On Main PWB (Without SDF)
PlJ6 To Fuser Heat Rod
PlJ7 To Fuser Jam Sensor
PI$ no.
p1j8
p1j9
Table 1
LOCATlON
To Fuser Thermistor RT1
To Toner Cartridge
FIG.
7-4
7-4 FIG.
-
Workcentre XD SERIES
Wiring-Data
Plug /Jack Location Index
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Plug / Jack Location Drawings
Wiring-Data 4/00
Plug / Jack Location Drawings 7-4 Workcentre XD SERIES
Figure 1 POWER SUPPLY PWB
Workcentre XD SERIES
Wiring-Data
Plug / Jack Location Drawings
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Figure 2 MAIN PWB (Without SDF)
MAIN PWB (WITHOUT SDF )
Wiring-Data 4/00 Plug /Jack Location Dravvings 7-6 Workcentre XD SERIES
MAIN PWB (redesigned)
Figure 3 MAIN PWB (With SDF)
Workcentre XD SERIES
Wiring-Data
Plug / Jack Location Drawings
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
Wiring-Data
Plug / Jack Location Drawings Workcentre XD SERIES
Block Schematic Diagrams
Workcentre XD SERIES
Wiring-Data
Block Schematic Diagrams
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
= 2201240 VAC (RXL)
CONNECTOR NUIVIBEEP, IN PRENTHESIS Q ARE FOR MACHINES EQUIPPTEU WITH AN SDF
STANDBY POWER CHAIN 1 LEVEL 2
SHEET 1 OF 2
Figure 1 : 1.1 Main Power On
Wiring-Data
Block Schematic Diagrams Workcentre XD SERIES
1.2 Power Generation and Distribution
DC POWER GENERATION
IN PRENTHESIS UIPPED WITH AN STANDBY POWER SHEET 1 OF1
CHAIN 1 LEVEL 2 SKY 1002A -.
Figure 2 : 1.2 Power Generation and Distribution
Workcentre XD SERIES
Wiring-Data
Block Schematic Diagrams
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
NOTE 0 l ~ach~ i i es equipped ~ t l ~ Tray 2,and or Wultiapie Bypass tiays oiily
MODE SELECTION CHAIN 2 LEVEL 2
SHEET 1 OF 2
(Quantity (Quantry
I
Figure 3 : 2.: Mode Selection
Wiring-Data
Block Schematic Diagrams Workcentre XD SERIES
r 2.2 Mode Indication
Control Console PWB FL 1 3
Figure 4 : 2.2 Mode lndication
4/00 Wiring-Data
Workcentre XD SERIES 7-1 3 Block Schematic Diagrams
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
, Mali? ividor On
IVlAlN MOTOR MOT1 RUNS WHEN THE READY LAMP IS ON AND START IS PRESSED \WHEN THE MAIN MOTOR IS ON THE VOLTAGE DECREASES TO APPROXIMATELY 1OTO 14VDC
@ CONNECTOR NUMBERS IN PARENTHESIS ARE FOR IVIACHINES EQUIPPED WITH AN
SDF
WlACHlNE RUN CONTROL SHEET 1 OF 1
Figure 5 : 4.1 Main Drive
Wiring-Data 4/00 Block Schematic Diagrams 7-1 4 Workcentre XD SERIES
7 a SIGNAL READS APPROXIMATELY 23 VAC'WHEN MOTOR IS OPERATING
SDF DOCUMENT FEED CHAIN 5 1
SHEET 1 OF2 SKY-5001
Figure 6 : 5.1 SDF Document Feed
4/00 Wiring-Data
Workcentre XD SERIES 7-1 !i Block Schematic Diagrams
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
(MACHINES WITH DUPLEX SDF ONLY)
MAIN PWB
DSDF Transport
DSDF Exit Roll
SGF Deflection Gate Solenold On iL) +24 VDC
(under SOL2)
SDF DOCUMENT FEED CHAIN 5 LEVEL 2
SHEET 2 OF 2
Figure 7 : 5.2 Duplex DSDF Components
Wiring-Data 4/00 Block Schematic Diagrams 7-1 6 Workcentre XD SERIES
6.1 Document Illumination
MAIN PWB PL 7.1
CONTROL LOGIC
NOTES THIS SIGNAL IS NOT MEASURABLE
@ CONNECTOR NUMBERS IN PARENTHESIS ARE FOR IvlACHlNES EQUIPPED WITH AN
SDF.
CHAIN6 LEVEL 2
Maln PWB (Wlthout SDF) Ivlaln PWB (With SDF)
Figure 8 : 6.1 Documentation Illumination
Workcentre XD SERIES
Wiring-Data
Block Schematic Diagrams
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
SCAN HOME
Maln PWB (With SDF)
Scan Home Sensor Q5
0 STEP 0 THRU STEP 3 SIGNALS ARE APPROXIMATELY 13 2 1 0 5VDC TO GND M a r PWB (Without SDF)
WHEN MOTOR IS OPERATING
CONNECTORNUMBERSIN @ PARENTHESIS ARE FOR MACHINES EQUIPPED WITH AN SDF
Figure 9 : 6.2 Scan Drive Control
Wiring-Data
Block Schematic Diagrams Workcentre XD SERIES
6.3 PRINTER INPUT
Maln PWB (Wlthout SDF)
PRINTER INPUT CHAIN6 LEVEL 2
SHEET 1 OF 1
NOTE. a CONNECTOR NUMBERS IN PARENTHESIS ARE FOR MACHINES EQUIPPED !,WITH AN SDF
Figure 10 : 6.3 Printer Input
4/00 Wiring-Data
Workcentre XD SERIES 7-1 9 Block Schematic Diagrams
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
LASER ASSElvlBLY PL 3 3
CN I
CN121
NOTE a CONNECTOR NUIVIBERS IN PARENTHESIS ARE FOR MACHINES EQUIPPED WITH AN SDF
Mail? PWB (iVQhout SDF) XEROGRAPHICS
Figure 11 : 6.4 image Processing
Wiring-Data 4/00 Biock Schematic Diagrams 7-20 Workcentre XD SERIES
Paper At Paper Feed Sensor
Paper At Tray 2
A PAPER JAM WILL OCCUR (PAPER JAM LAMP FLASHING) IF. Tray 2 Feed Solenold
A. THE PAPER FEED SENSOR IS ACTUATED AT POWER ON B THE PAPER FEED SENSOR DOES NOT DEACTUATE IN TIME
@ A FLASHING ' P STATUS CODE WILL BE DISPLAYED IF THE PAPER FEED SENSOR Q1 IS NOT ACTUATED IN TIIVIE AFTER START IS PRESSED PAPER FEED
@ CONNECTOR NUMBERS lN PARENTHESIS ARE FOR CHAIN 8 LEVEL 2 [VIACHINES EQUIPPED WITH AN SDF SHEET I OF I
Figure 12 : 8.1 Paper Feed
4/00 Wiring-Data
Workcentre XD SERIES 7-21 Block Schematic Diagrams
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
A PAPER JAM WILL OCCUR (PAPER JAM LAMP FLASHING) IF A THE PAPER FEED SENSOR IS ACTUATED AT POlnIER ON 5 THE PAPER FEED SENSOR DOES NOT DEACTUATE IN TIME
@ A FLASHINC P STATUS CODE WILL BE DISPLAYED IF THE PAPER
Fuser Jam Sensor Q3
Figure 13 : 8.2 Paper Registration
Wiring-Data
Block Schematic Diagrams Workcentre XD SERIES
MAIN PWB lpLil/ CONTROL CONSOLE PWB PL 1 3
8.3 Paper Tray Interlocks
CONNECTOR NUMBERS IN PARENTHESIS 0 ARE FOR lvi4CHlNES EQUPED WWH AN SDF
@ TRAY LEDs WILL FLASH WHEN THE TRAY IS SELCETED AND OPEN
PAPER SUPPLY CHAIN 8 LEVEL 2
SHEET 1 OF1
Figure 14 : 8.3 Paper Tray lnterlocks
Workcentre XD SERIES
Wiring-Data
Block Schematic Diagrams
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
9.1 Charge, Transfer And Detack
124 VDC
6 N O T E 5 0 ~~~U~~~~ COPY COUNT WILL RESETTO 0 WHEN THE NEVI DRUM SENSOR IS
O D CODE GRfDSIGNALA GRID SIGNAL B
NORMAL [6-21
PHOTO 18-31 +24 VDC
SAVE [8-41 +24 VDC XEROGRAPHICS CHAIN 9 LEVEL 2
CONSOLE MAIN PWB
Contra1 DRUM CARTRIDGE Console RESET SWITCH Harness P L 5 1
New Drum Sensed
-- (H) +5 VDC
I BRN RESET
Q POWER
GND
Figure 15 : 9.1 Charge, Transfer and Detack
Wiring-Data 4/00
Block Schematic Diagrams 7-24 Workcentre XD SERIES
LOW TONE
GND +24VDC
XEROGRAPHICS
TONER DISPENSE
Figure 16 : 9.2 Development
4/00 Wiring-Data Workcentre XD SERIES 7-25 Block Schematic Diagrams
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
H2 = THERhlllSTOR IS OPEN Tlitiimlstor RTI
H4 = FUSER DOES NOT VVARId UP WITHIN 27 SECONDS " QIHEN AN H OR L STATUS CODE IS PRESENT THE POWER RELAY SIGNAL GOES HIGH REMOVING POWER TO
= 2201240 VAC (BOHZ)
REFER TO BSD 1 1 TO CHECKTHE 7 @ OPERATION OF RELAY RY1 FUSING AND COPY EXIT
CHAIN 10 LEVEL 2 SHEET 1 OF 2 @ CONNECTOR NUMBERS IN PARENTHESIS ARE
FOR MACHINES EQUIPPED WITH AN SDF
Figure 17 : 10.1 Fusing
Wiring-Data
Block Scl-rernalic Diagrams
MAIN PWB
GRY I A - I
Paper Exlt Sensor 0 4
A PAPER JAM WILL OCCUR (PAPER JAM LAlVlP FLASHING) IF @ A EXIT SENSOR Q4 IS ACTUATED AT POWER ON B PAPER LEAD EDGE DOES NOT ACTUATE THE EXlT SENSOR Q4 IN TliblE C EXlT SENSOR Q4 REMAINS ACTUATED TOO LONG AFTER THE COPY CYCLE
FUSING AND COPY EXIT @ CONNECTOR NUMBERS IN PARENTHESIS ARE CHAIN 1 0 L LEVEL 2 FOR lvlACHlNES EQUIPPED WITH AN SDF SHEET 2 OF 2
SKY-1013
Figure 18 : 10.2 Copy Exit
ONLY) -. -. -. -
I i : :
Workcentre XD SERIES
Wiring-Data
Block Schematic Diagrams
manuals4you.commanuals4you.com
This page intensionally left blank
Wiring-Data 4/00
Block Schematic Diagrams 7-28 Workcentre XD SERIES